DUAL BAND

HEAVY DUTY SUBMERSIBLE TRANSCEIVER
VX-6R
OPERATING MANUAL
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
4-8-8 Nakameguro, Meguro-Ku, Tokyo 153-8644, Japan
VERTEX STANDARD
US Headquarters
10900 Walker Street, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A.
YAESU EUROPE B.V.
P.O. Box 75525, 1118 ZN Schiphol, The Netherlands
YAESU UK LTD.
Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close
Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K.
VERTEX STANDARD HK LTD.
Unit 5, 20/F., Seaview Centre, 139-141 Hoi Bun Road,
Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Contents
Scanning...................................................................... 46
VFO Scanning ................................................................................ 47
Setting the Squelch Level during activate Scanning Opertion 48
How to Skip (Omit) a Frequency during VFO Scan ............. 48
Memory Scanning .......................................................................... 49
How to Skip (Omit) a Channel during Memory Scan ........... 49
Preferential Memory Scan ....................................................... 50
Memory Bank Scan ................................................................. 51
Programmable (Band Limit) Memory Scan (PMS) ..................... 52
“Priority Channel” Scanning (Dual Watch) ................................. 53
Automatic Lamp Illumination on Scan Stop ................................ 54
Band Edge Beeper .......................................................................... 54
Weather Alert Scan ........................................................................ 55
Smart Search Operation ........................................... 56
Channel Counter Operation ...................................... 58
EPCS (Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch) ................... 60
Storing the CTCSS Tone Pairs for EPCS Operation ..................... 60
Activating the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch System .......... 61
Paging Answer Back ...................................................................... 61
Emergency Feature .................................................... 62
Emergency Channel Operation ..................................................... 62
Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature ...................................... 62
Selecting the EAI mode and its Transmit Time ..................... 63
Activating the EAI feature ...................................................... 63
To Locate an Unresponsive Operator Using the EAI Feature 64
ARTS
TM
(Automatic Range Transponder System) ....... 65
Sensor Mode ............................................................... 68
To display the Temperature ........................................................... 68
To display the Sensor Information ................................................ 68
Selecting and Correcting the Atmospheric Pressure Meter ......... 69
Selecting and Correcting the Altimeter ........................................ 69
Internet Connection Feature ..................................... 70
SRG (“Sister Radio Group”) Mode .............................................. 70
FRG (“Friendly Radio Group”) Mode .......................................... 71
DTMF Operation ....................................................... 73
Manual DTNF Tone Generation ................................................... 73
DTNF Autodialer ........................................................................... 73
CW Training Feature ................................................ 75
Miscellaneous Settings ............................................... 76
Password ......................................................................................... 76
Programming the “P” Key ............................................................. 77
Receive Battery Saver Setup ......................................................... 77
Wakeup Feature Setup ................................................................... 78
TX Battery Saver ........................................................................... 79
ATT (Front End Attenuator) .......................................................... 79
Disabling the TX/BUSY Indicator ................................................ 80
Automatic Power-Off (APO) Feature ........................................... 80
Automatic Power-On Feature ........................................................ 81
Busy Channel Lock-Out (BCLO) ................................................. 82
Transmitter Time-Out Timer (TOT) ............................................. 83
Changing the TX Deviation Level ................................................ 83
Reset Procedures ....................................................... 85
Cloning ........................................................................ 86
Set (Menu) Mode ....................................................... 87
Specifications ............................................................ 104
“AUTO” Mode Preset Operating Parameters ...... 106
General Description ..................................................... 1
Accessories & Options ................................................. 2
Controls & Connections .............................................. 3
Top & Front Panel ............................................................................ 3
LCD ................................................................................................... 4
Side & Bottom Panel ........................................................................ 5
Keypad ............................................................................................... 6
Installation of Accessories ........................................... 8
Antenna Installation .......................................................................... 8
Belt Clip & Hand Strap Installation ................................................. 8
Installation of FNB-80LI Battery Pack ............................................ 9
Battery Charging ............................................................................... 9
Installation of FBA-23 Battery Case ............................................. 10
Low Battery Indication .................................................................. 10
Interface of Packet TNCs .......................................... 11
Operation .................................................................... 12
Switching Power On and Off ........................................................ 12
Adjusting the Volume Level ......................................................... 12
Squelch Adjustment ....................................................................... 13
Selecting the Operating Band ........................................................ 14
Frequency Navigation .................................................................... 14
Transmission .................................................................................. 16
Changing the Transmit Power Level ...................................... 17
Changing the Microphone Gain Level ................................... 18
AM Broadcast Reception .............................................................. 18
AM Aircraft Reception .................................................................. 19
FM Broadcast/TV Audio Reception ............................................. 19
Advanced Operation .................................................. 20
Keyboard Locking .......................................................................... 20
Adjusting the Keypad Beeper Volume Level ............................... 21
Keypad/LCD Illumination ............................................................. 21
Changing the Channel Steps .......................................................... 22
Changing the Receiving Mode ...................................................... 22
RF Squelch ..................................................................................... 23
Checking the Battery Voltage ....................................................... 23
Repeater Operation ................................................... 24
Repeater Shifts ............................................................................... 24
Automatic Repeater Shift (ARS) .................................................. 24
Manual Repeater Shift Activation ................................................. 25
CTCSS/DCS Operation ............................................. 27
CTCSS Operation .......................................................................... 27
DCS Operation ............................................................................... 28
DCS Code Inversion ...................................................................... 29
CTCSS/DCS Bell Operation ......................................................... 30
Tone Search Scanning ................................................................... 31
Split Tone Operation ...................................................................... 32
Tone Calling (1750 Hz) ................................................................. 32
Memory Mode ............................................................ 33
Memory Storage ............................................................................. 34
Storing Independent Transmit Frequencies (“Odd Split”) ........... 34
Memory Recall ............................................................................... 35
Labeling Memories ........................................................................ 35
Memory Offset Tuning .................................................................. 37
Moving Memory Data to the VFO ................................................ 38
Masking Memories ........................................................................ 38
Memory Only Mode ...................................................................... 38
HOME Channel Memory .............................................................. 39
Memory Bank Operation ............................................................... 40
Direct Memory Recall Channel .................................................... 42
Short-Wave Broadcast Station Memory Channels ....................... 43
Weather Broadcast Channels ......................................................... 44
VHF-Marine Channels ................................................................... 45
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The VX-6R is a dual band heavy duty submersible

transceiver with extensive receive
frequency coverage, providing local-area two-way amateur communications along with
unmatched monitoring capability.
The VX-6R’s small size allows you to take it anywhere - hiking, skiing, or while walking
around town - and its operating flexibility brings the user many avenues of operating enjoy-
ment. Its incredibly compact FNB-80LI Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack provides
up to 5 Watts of transmit power on 144 MHz and 430 MHz Amateur Bands. Besides 144-
and 430-MHz transceive operation, the VX-6R provides receive coverage of the AM (MF)
and FM broadcast bands, HF Shortwave Bands, VHF and UHF TV bands, the VHF AM
aircraft band, and a wide range of commercial and public safety frequencies! Further more,
the USA version enables 1.5 Watts of transmitted power on the 222 MHz Amateur Band.
New and exciting features of the VX-6R are the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) function,
that will automatically cause your VX-6R to transmit your callsign and engage your rig’s
microphone, even if you are disabled and unable to press the PTT switch; Enhanced Pag-
ing and Code Squelch (EPCS), that allows you to page a particular station and only receive
calls from that station, if desired; and a security Password feature, that will allow you to
turn on and operate your transceiver only after you
enter your Password.
Additional features include a convenient access key
for Vertex Standard’s WIRES™ (Wide-coverage
Internet Repeater Enhancement System), a trans-
mit Time-Out Timer (TOT), Automatic Power-Off
(APO), Automatic Repeater Shift (ARS), Yaesu’s
exclusive ARTS™ (Auto-Range Transponder Sys-
tem) which “beeps” the user when you move out of
communications range with another ARTS™
equipped station, plus provision for reduction of the
TX deviation in areas of high channel congestion.
And an RF squelch circuit allows the owner to set
the squelch to open at a programmable setting of
the S-Meter, thus reducing guesswork in setting the
squelch threshold.
We appreciate your purchase of the VX-6R, and
encourage you to read this manual thoroughly, so
as to learn about the many exciting features of your
exciting new Yaesu hand-held transceiver!

: JIS-6 Specification for submersibility:
3 ft. for 30 minutes
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 2
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
FNB-80LI 7.4 V, 1,400 mAh
Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack
NC-72B/C

5-Hour Battery Charger
CLIP-14 Quick Draw Belt Clip
YHA-67 Antenna
Operating Manual
Warranty Card
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
FNB-80LI 7.4 V, 1,400 mAh
Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack
FBA-23 2 x “AA” Cell Battery Case (batteries not supplied)
CD-15A Rapid Charger (requires NC-72B/C/U)
NC-72B/C/U

5-Hour Battery Charger
E-DC-5B DC Cable with Cigarette-Lighter Adapter
E-DC-6 DC Cable; plug and wire only
MH-57A4B Speaker/Microphone
CMP460A Waterproof Speaker/Microphone
VC-27 Ear piece/Microphone
CT-91 Microphone Adapter
CN-3 BNC-to-SMA Adapter
SU-1 Barometric Pressure Sensor Unit
CSC-91 Soft Case

: “B” suffix is for use with 100-120 VAC, “C” suffix is for use with 230-240 VAC.
Availability of accessories may vary. Some accessories are supplied as standard per local
requirements, while others may be unavailable in some regions. This product is designed
to perform optimally when used with genuine Yaesu accessories. Vertex Standard shall not
be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, leakage or explo-
sion of a battery pack, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-Yaesu accessories. Consult
your Yaesu dealer for details regarding these and any newly-available options. Connec-
tion of any non-Yaesu-approved accessory, should it cause damage, may void the Limited
Warranty on this apparatus.
ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 3
CONTROL & CONNECTIONS
(
TOP & FRONT PANEL
)
C
Antenna Jack
Connect the supplied rubber flex antenna (or another
antenna presenting a 50-Ohm impedance) here.
C
MIC/SP Jack
This four-conductor miniature jack provides connec-
tion points for microphone audio, earphone audio, PTT,
and ground.
Do not allow the VX-6R to become submerged in water while the plastic
cover over the MIC/SP jack is removed.
C
VOL Knob
This control adjusts the audio volume level. Clockwise rotation increases the volume
level.
C
DIAL Knob
This (inner) 20-position detented rotary switch is used for setting the operating fre-
quency, and also is used for menu selections and other adjustments.
¨
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
The display shows current operating conditions, as indicated on the next page.
©
POWER Switch
Press and hold in this switch for one second to
toggle the transceiver’s power on and off.
C
Keypad
These 18 keys select many of most im-
portant operating features on the VX-6R.
The functions of the keys are described
in detail on the pages to follow.
©
Microphone
The internal microphone is located here.
©
Speaker
The internal speaker is located here.
1
TX/BUSY Indicator Lamp
This indicator glows green when the squelch opens, and turns red during transmit.
During “Emergency Channel” operation (see page 62), this indicator will glow (or
flash) white. Also, this indicator can be useful as a flashlight in a dark environment via
Set Mode Item 34: LED LT; see page 96 for details.
©
C
©
³
1
C
C ? C C
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 4
CONTROL & CONNECTIONS
(
LCD
)
S- & PO Meter
Secondary Keypad Active
Key Lock Active
Operating Mode
Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature Active
Battery Saver Active
Battery Indicator
Low TX Power Selected Bell Alarm Active
Automatic Power-Off Active
Dual Watch Active
Operating Frequency
Memory Channel Number
Skip Memory Channel or
Preferential Memory Channel
Repeater Shift Direction
CTCSS/DSC Operation
Internet Connection
Feature Active
Priority Channel
DMR Channel Recall
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 5
C
PTT (Push To Talk) Switch
Press this switch to transmit, and re-
lease it (to receive) after your trans-
mission is completed.
C
MONI Switch
Pressing this switch disables the
noise squelching action, allowing
you to hear very weak signals near
the background noise level tempo-
rarily.
Press the
[
F/W
]
key on the keypad
first, then press this switch to en-
able to adjustment of the squelch
threshold level.
C
EXT DC Jack
This coaxial DC jack allows connection to an external DC power source (6-16V DC).
The center pin of this jack is the Positive (+) connection.
Do not allow the VX-6R to become submerged in water while the rubber cap
over the EXT DC jack is removed.
C
Battery Pack Latch
Open this latch for battery removal.
CONTROL & CONNECTIONS
(
SIDE & BOTTOM PANEL
)
C
?
C
C
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 6
CONTROL & CONNECTIONS
(
KEYPAD
)
Third Function
(
PRESS & HOLD KEY
)
Secondary Function
(
PRESS
[
F/W
]
+ KEY
)
Primary Function
(
PRESS KEY
)
Third Function
(
PRESS & HOLD KEY
)
Secondary Function
(
PRESS
[
F/W
]
+ KEY
)
Primary Function
(
PRESS KEY
)
Frequency entry digit
“1”
Frequency entry digit
“2”
Selects the CTCSS
tone or DCS code
number
Frequency entry digit
“4”
Activates the EMER-
GENCY function
Frequency entry digit
“5”
Activates the EPCS
(Enhanced Paging &
Code Squelch) feature
Selects the Memory
Scan “Skip” channel-
selection mode
Third Function
(
PRESS & HOLD KEY
)
Secondary Function
(
PRESS
[
F/W
]
+ KEY
)
Primary Function
(
PRESS KEY
)
Moves operation to the
next-highest frequency
band
Moves operation to the
next-lowest frequency
band
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “1”
Frequency entry digit
“8”
Frequency entry digit
“7”
Selects the synthesizer
steps to be used during
VFO operation.
Activates the ARTS
TM
feature
Activates the EAI
TM
(Emergency Automatic
ID) feature
Selects the desired
transmit power output
level
Activates the Key
Lockout feature
Reverses the transmit
and receive frequen-
cies while working
through a repeater
Switches to the “Home”
(favorite frequency)
Channel
Activates the Internet
Connection feature
Starts the scanner
upward
(toward a higher
frequency or
a higher channel number)
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “2”
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “4”
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “5”
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “7”
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “8”
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 7
Activates CTCSS or
DCS Operation
Selects the direction of
the uplink frequency
shift (either “–,” “+,” or
“simplex”) during
repeater operation
Third Function
(
PRESS & HOLD KEY
)
Secondary Function
(
PRESS
[
F/W
]
+ KEY
)
Primary Function
(
PRESS KEY
)
Third Function
(
PRESS & HOLD KEY
)
Secondary Function
(
PRESS
[
F/W
]
+ KEY
)
Primary Function
(
PRESS KEY
)
Third Function
(
PRESS & HOLD KEY
)
Secondary Function
(
PRESS
[
F/W
]
+ KEY
)
Primary Function
(
PRESS KEY
)
Frequency entry digit
“3”
Frequency entry digit
“6”
Frequency entry digit
“9”
Frequency entry digit
“0”
Selects the Receive
mode among AM, FM,
and Wide FM
Selects the DTMF
mode
Engage the Special
Search mode
Switches frequency
control between the
VFO and Memory
Systems
Activates the Priority
(Dual Watch) function
Engages the Set
(Menu) Mode
Enter the Special Bank
mode
Activates the “Second-
ary” key function
Disables the “Second-
ary” key function
Activates the “Memory
Write” mode (for
memory channel
storage)
Activates the “Memory
Tune” mode while in
the Memory Recall
mode
Activates the “User
Programmed” mode
No Action
Activates the Direct
Memory Recall
Channel function
CONTROL & CONNECTIONS
(
KEYPAD
)
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “3”
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “6”
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “9”
Stores the current
setting into Direct
Memory Recall
Channel “0”
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 8
ANTENNA INSTALLATION
The supplied antenna provides good results over the entire fre-
quency range of the transceiver. However, for enhanced recep-
tion on certain non-Amateur frequencies, you may wish to con-
nect an antenna designed specifically for that frequency range,
as the supplied antenna is necessarily a compromise outside the
Amateur bands, and cannot be expected to provide high perfor-
mance at all frequencies.
To install the supplied antenna, hold the bottom end of the an-
tenna, then screw it onto the mating connector on the transceiver
until it is snug. Do not over-tighten by use of extreme force.
Notes:
Never transmit without having an antenna connected.
When installing the supplied antenna, never hold the upper
part of the antenna while screwing it onto the mating connector on the transceiver.
If using an external antenna for transmission, ensure that the SWR presented to the
transceiver is 1.5:1 or lower, to avoid excessive feedline loss.
BELT CLIP & HAND STRAP INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 9
INSTALLATION OF FNB-80LI BATTERY PACK
The FNB-80LI is a high-performance Lithium-Ion battery providing high capacity in a
very compact package. Under normal use, the FNB-80LI may be used for approximately
300 charge cycles, after which operating time may be expected to decrease. If you have an
old battery pack which is displaying capacity which has become diminished, you should
replace the pack with a new one.
Install the FNB-80LI as shown in the illustration.
Close the Battery Pack Latch on the bottom of the radio.
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
1) Do not attempt to open any of the rechargeable Li-Ion packs, as personal
injury or damage to the Li-Ion pack could occur if a cell or cells become acci-
dentally short-circuited.
2) Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type.
BATTERY CHARGING
If the battery has never been used, or its charge is depleted, it may be charged by connect-
ing the NC-72B/C Battery Charger, as shown in the illustration, to the EXT DC jack. If
only 12 ~ 16 Volt DC power is available, the optional E-DC-5B or E-DC-6 DC Adapter
(with its cigarette lighter plug) may also be used for charging the battery.
The display will indicate “CHGING,” and the TX/BUSY indicator will glow red, while the
battery is being charged. When charging is finished, the display will change to indicate
“CHGFUL” and the TX/BUSY indicator will glow green.
NC-72
AC line Outlet
E-DC-5B E-DC-6
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 10
INSTALLATION OF FBA-23 ALKALINE BATTERY CASE
(
OPTION
)
The optional FBA-23 Battery Case allows receive monitoring using two “AA” size Alka-
line batteries. Alkaline batteries can also be used for transmission in an emergency, but
power output will only be selectable 300 mW and 50 mW, and battery life will be short-
ened dramatically.
To Install Alkaline Batteries into the FBA-23
Slide the batteries into the FBA-23 as shown in the illustration,
with the Negative [–] side of the batteries touching the spring
connections inside the FBA-23.
Open the Battery Pack Latch on the bottom of the radio.
Install the FBA-23 as shown in the illustration, with the [+] side
facing the bottom of the transceiver.
Close the Battery Pack Latch on the bottom of the radio.
The FBA-23 does not provide connections for charging, since Alkaline cells cannot be re-
charged. Therefore, the NC-72B/C, E-DC-5B, or E-DC-6 may safely be connected to the
EXT DC jack when the FBA-23 is installed.
1) The FBA-23 is designed for use only with AA-type Alkaline cells.
2) If you do not use the VX-6R for a long time, remove the Alkaline batteries
from the FBA-23, as battery leakage could cause damage to the FBA-23 and/or the
transceiver.
LOW BATTERY INDICATION
As your battery discharges during use, the voltage will gradually become lower. When
the battery voltage is becoming too low for reliable operation,
the “ ” icon will blink on the LCD display, indicating that the
battery pack must be recharged before further use.
Avoid recharging Lithium-Ion batteries before the “ ” indicator is observed, as this
can degrade the charge capacity of your Lithium-Ion battery pack.
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 11
The VX-6R may be used for Packet operation, using the optional CT-91 microphone adapter
(available from your Yaesu dealer) for easy interconnection to commonly-available con-
nectors wired to your TNC. You may also build your own cable, using a four-conductor
miniature phone plug, per the diagram below.
The audio level from the receiver to the TNC may be adjusted by using the VOL knob, as
with voice operation. The input level to the VX-6R from the TNC may be adjusted via Set
Mode Item 37: MCGAIN; see page 18 for details.
Be sure to turn the transceiver and TNC off before connecting the cables, so as to prevent
voltage spikes from possibly damaging your transceiver.
When you are operating on Packet, switch the Receive Battery Saver OFF, as the “sleep”
cycle may “collide” with the beginning of an incoming Packet transmission, causing your
TNC not to receive the full data burst. See page 77 for details regarding Receive Battery
Saver setup. Remember to readjust the default microphone input level to “LVL 5” (Set
Mode Item 37: MCGAIN) when Packet operation is finished.
INTERFACE OF PACKET TNCS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 12
Hi! I’m R. F. Radio, and I’ll be helping you along as you learn the many
features of the VX-6R. I know you’re anxious to get on the air, but I encour-
age you to read the “Operation” section of this manual as thoroughly as
possible, so you’ll get the most out of this fantastic new transceiver. Now. . .let’s get
operating!
SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF
1. Be sure the Battery Pack is installed, and that the bat-
tery is fully charged. Connect the antenna to the top
panel ANTENNA jack.
2. Press and hold in the orange POWER switch (on the
left side of the front panel) for one second. Two beeps
will be heard when the switch has been held long
enough, and the current DC supply voltage will indi-
cated on the display for 2 seconds; if you are using the FNB-80LI Battery Pack, the
small “Lit” notation at the top of the display confirms that the Lithium-Ion Battery
Pack has been detected. After this 2-second interval, the display will resume its normal
indication of the operating frequency.
3. To turn the VX-6R off, press and hold in the POWER switch again for one second.
1) If you don’t hear the two “Beep” tones when the radio comes on, the Beeper
may have been disabled via the Menu system. See page 21, which tells you
how to reactivate the Beeper.
2) You can change the Opening Message (DC supply voltage indication) to any desired
message (up to 6 characters) via Set Mode Item 42: OPN.MSG; see page 48 for details.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME LEVEL
Rotate the VOLUME control (inner knob) to set the de-
sired audio level. Clockwise rotation increases the volume
level.
OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 13
OPERATION
SQUELCH ADJUSTMENT
The VX-6R’s Squelch system allows you to mute the background noise when no signal is
being received. Not only does the Squelch system make “standby” operation more pleas-
ant, it also significantly reduces battery current consumption.
The Squelch system may be adjusted independently for the FM and Wide-FM (FM Broad-
cast) modes. AM utilizes the setting chosen for FM.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the MONI switch on
the left side of the radio. This provides a “Short-cut” to
Set Mode Item 58: SQL.
2. Now, rotate the DIAL knob to set the Squelch so that
the background noise is just silenced (typically at a set-
ting of about “1” or “2” for FM and AM, and “2” or
“3” for Wide-FM); this is point of maximum sensitiv-
ity to weak signals.
3. When you are satisfied with the Squelch threshold setting, press the PTT key momen-
tarily to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
1) A special “RF Squelch” feature is provided on the VX-6R. This feature
allows you to set the squelch so that only signals exceeding a certain S-meter
level will open the squelch. See page 23 for details.
2) If you’re operating in an area of high RF pollution, you may need to consider “Tone
Squelch” operation using the built-in CTCSS Decoder. This feature will keep your ra-
dio quiet until a call is received from a station sending a carrier which contains a matching
(subaudible) CTCSS tone. Or, if your friends have radios equipped with DCS (Digital
Coded Squelch) like your VX-6R has, try using that mode for silent monitoring of busy
channels.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 14
SELECTING THE OPERATING BAND
The VX-6R covers an incredibly
wide frequency range, over
which a number of different op-
erating modes are used. There-
fore, the VX-6R’s frequency cov-
erage has been divided into dif-
ferent operating bands, each of
which has its own pre-set chan-
nel steps and operating modes.
You can change the channel steps
and operating modes later, if you
like (see page 22).
To Change Operating Bands:
1. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key repetitively. You will see the LCD indication
move toward a higher frequency band each time you
press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key.
2. If you wish to move the operating band selection down-
ward (toward lower frequencies), press the
[
F/W
]
key
first, then press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key.
3. Once you have selected the desired band, you may ini-
tiate manual tuning (or scanning) per the discussion in
the next chapter.
When receiving in the AM Broadcast or Shortwave bands (0.5-30 MHz), we recommend
that you connect an external antenna, for improved reception.
FREQUENCY NAVIGATION
The VX-6R will initially be operating in the “VFO” mode, a channelized system which
allows free tuning throughout the currently-selected operating band.
Three basic frequency navigation methods are available on the VX-6R:
1
)
Tuning Dial
Rotation of the DIAL allows tuning in the pre-programmed
steps established for the current operating band. Clockwise
rotation of the DIAL causes the VX-6R to be tuned toward
a higher frequency, while counter-clockwise rotation will
lower the operating frequency.
If you press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily, then rotate the
OPERATION
BAND
FREQUENCY RANGE
[
BAND NUMBER
]
USA VERSION EXP VERSION
BC Band
[
1
]
0.5 - 1.8 MHz 0.504 - 1.8 MHz
SW Band
[
2
]
1.8 - 30 MHz 1.8 - 30 MHz
50 MHz Ham Band
[
3
]
30 - 59 MHz 30 - 88 MHz
FM BC Band
[
4
]
59 - 108 MHz 88 - 108 MHz
Air Band
[
5
]
108 - 137 MHz 108 - 137 MHz
144 MHz Ham Band
[
6
]
137 - 174 MHz 137 - 174 MHz
VHF-TV Band
[
7
]
174 - 222 MHz 174 - 222 MHz
222 MHz Ham Band
[
8
]
222 - 420 MHz 222 - 420 MHz
430 MHz Ham Band
[
9
]
420 - 470 MHz 420 - 470 MHz
UHF-TV Band
[
A
]
470 - 800 MHz 470 - 800 MHz
Action Band
[
b
]
803 - 999 MHz 800 - 999 MHz
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 15
DIAL, frequency steps of 1 MHz will be selected. This feature is extremely useful for
making rapid frequency excursions over the wide tuning range of the VX-6R.
2
)
Direct Keypad Frequency Entry
The desired operating frequency may be entered directly from the keypad.
To enter a frequency from the keypad, just press the numbered digits on the keypad in the
proper sequence. There is no “Decimal point” key on the VX-6R, so if the frequency is
below 100 MHz (e.g. 15.150 MHz), any required leading zeroes must be entered. How-
ever, there is a short-cut for frequencies ending in zero - press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key after
the last non-zero digit.
Examples:
To enter 146.520 MHz, press
[
1
]

[
4
]

[
6
]

[
5
]

[
6
]

[
0
]
To enter 15.255 MHz, press
[
0
]

[
1
]

[
5
]

[
2
]

[
5
]

[
5
]
To enter 1.250 MHz (1250 kHz), press
[
0
]

[
0
]

[
1
]

[
2
]

[
5
]

[
0
]
To enter 0.950 MHz (950 kHz), press
[
0
]

[
0
]

[
0
]

[
9
]

[
5
]

[
0
]
To enter 430.000MHz, press
[
4
]

[
3
]

[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
3
)
Scanning
From the VFO mode, press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one second,
and rotate the DI AL knob while holding in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key, to select the bandwidth for
the VFO scanner, then release the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to begin scanning toward a higher frequency. The scan-
ner will stop when it receives a signal strong enough to break
through the Squelch threshold. The VX-6R will then hold
on that frequency according to the setting of the “RESUME”
mode (Set Mode Item 48: RESUME). See page 46 for details regarding Scan Operation.
If you wish to reverse the direction of the scan (i.e. toward a lower frequency, instead of a
higher frequency), just rotate the DIAL one click in the counter-clockwise direction while
the VX-6R is scanning. The scanning direction will be reversed. To revert to scanning
toward a higher frequency once more, rotate the DIAL one click clockwise.
Press the PTT switch momentarily to cancel the scanning. This only stops the scan; it does
not cause transmission to occur.
OPERATION
FREQUENCY NAVIGATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 16
TRANSMISSION
Once you have set up an appropriate frequency inside one of the 144 MHz, 222 MHz

, or
430 MHz Amateur bands on which the VX-6R can transmit, you’re ready to go on the air!
These are the most basic steps; more advanced aspects of transmitter operation will be dis-
cussed later (222 MHz: USA version only).
1. To transmit, press the PTT switch, and speak into the
front panel microphone (located in the upper right-hand
corner of the speaker grille) in a normal voice level.
The TX/BUSY indicator will glow red during trans-
mission.
2. To return to the receive mode, release the PTT switch.
3. During transmission, the relative power level will be
indicated on the bar graph at the bottom of the LCD; full scale
deflection confirms “High Power” operation, while deflection
of three bars indicates “Low 1 Power” operation. Five bars indi-
cates “Low 2 Power” operation and seven bars indicates “Low 3
Power” operation. Additionally, the “LOW” icon will appear at
the bottom of the display while operating on the “Low Power”
settings.
1) If you’re just talking to friends in the immediate area,
you’ll get much longer battery life by switching to Low
Power operation, described in the next chapter. And don’t
forget: always have an antenna connected when you transmit.
2) Transmission is possible only on the 144 MHz, 222 MHz (U.S.A.
version only), and 430 MHz bands.
3) If other users report that you always have a DTMF “beep” at the
beginning of each transmission, you may have accidentally switched
on the “Internet Connection” feature. Just press the [ (LK)TXPO] key momentarily to
disable this feature, which is described in detail on page 70.
OPERATION
“LOW 1” POWER
“LOW 2” POWER
“LOW 3” POWER
“HIGH” POWER
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 17
Changing the Transmitter Power Level
You can select between a total of four transmitter power levels on your VX-6R. The exact
power output will vary somewhat, depending on the volt-
age supplied to the transceiver. With the standard FNB-
80LI Battery Pack and external DC source, the power out-
put levels available are:
To change the power level:
1. The default setting for the power output is “High;” in
this configuration, the LCD shows
no indication of the power output
level. Pressing the
[
F/W
]
key, fol-
lowed by the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key,
will display the current power out-
put level.
2. Within one second of releasing the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key, press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key repetitively; this will cause the power level “LOW1,” “LOW2,” or “LOW3” to
appear.
3. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key (repeatedly, if necessary) to
make the “HIGH” notation appear and restore High Power operation.
1) The VX-6R is smart! You can set up Low power on the 144 MHz band,
while leaving 430 MHz on High power, and the radio will remember the
different settings on both bands. And when you store memories, you can store
the power output settings separately in each memory, so you don’t waste battery power
when using very close-in repeaters!
2) When you are operating on the “Low” power settings, you can press the [F/W] key,
then press the PTT switch, to cause the VX-6R to transmit (temporarily) on High power.
After one transmission, the power level will revert to the previously-selected setting.
OPERATION
TRANSMISSION
144/430 MHz
5.0 W
2.5 W
1.0 W
0.3 W
HIGH
LOW 3
LOW 2
LOW 1
220 MHz
1.5 W
1.0 W
0.5 W
0.2 W
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 18
Changing the Microphone Gain Level
Different operators speak at different voice levels, and speak at varying distances from the
radio’s microphone. So as to compensate for these differences, the VX-6R includes a Mi-
crophone Gain control, that allows you to set the Microphone Gain to the best level ac-
cording to your operating preferences. Here’s how to set the level:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 37: MCGAIN.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the gain to a different level. The
default setting is “LVL 5;” if you wish to reduce the level, try a
setting or “LVL 3” or “LVL 4” while transmitting and speaking
into the microphone; you can hear the effects by monitoring on another radio tuned to
your operating frequency.
5. When you have made your selection, press and hold in the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key for 2 seconds
to save the new setting and exit to normal operation
AM BROADCAST RECEPTION
The VX-6R includes provision for reception of AM broadcasts, either on the standard
medium-wave (MW) broadcast band, or on the shortwave bands up to 30 MHz.
1. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key (or press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key) repetitively until you see a frequency in the frequency
range desired. The MW coverage is 0.5 MHz to 1.8 MHz, while the shortwave broad-
cast coverage is 1.8 MHz to 30 MHz. In either case, the operat-
ing mode (displayed on the bottom left of the LCD) should be
shown as being “AM.”
2. Rotate the DIAL to tune across the broadcast band.
3. You may also use the keypad to enter frequencies directly. This
method will be quicker for changing from the 49-meter broad-
cast band to the 31-meter band, for example.
1) If the operating mode is not correct, you may change the operating mode
by pressing the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key.
2) The VX-6R includes a special memory bank into which the factory has
stored 89 frequencies representing popular Short-wave Broadcast stations. See page 43
for details.
OPERATION
USA Version
EXP Version
TRANSMISSION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 19
AM AIRCRAFT RECEPTION
Reception of AM signals in the aeronautical band (108-137 MHz) is similar to that de-
scribed in the previous section.
1. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key (or press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key) (repetitively, if necessary), until
you see a frequency in the aeronautical band.
2. Rotate the DIAL to tune across the aeronautical band.
3. You may also use the keypad to enter frequencies directly. Remember that frequencies
quoted by aircraft operators may be abbreviated, and that the “5” at the end of a fre-
quency may be dropped. Since aeronautical channels are assigned in 25-kHz steps,
therefore, a frequency announced as “thirty-two, forty-two” corresponds to an operat-
ing frequency of 132.425 MHz.
FM BROADCAST/TV AUDIO RECEPTION
The VX-6R also includes provision for reception in the FM broadcast band, utilizing a
wide-bandwidth filter which provides excellent fidelity.
To Activate FM Broadcast Reception
1. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key (or press the
[
F/W
]
key,
followed by the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key) repetitively until
a frequency in the FM broadcast band appears on the display.
The total frequency range included in the “FM” band is 59-108
MHz.
2. Rotate the DIAL to select the desired station. The default synthe-
sizer steps for the W-FM mode are 100 kHz/step.
To Activate VHF or UHF TV Audio Reception
1. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key (or press the
[
F/W
]
key,
followed by the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key) repetitively until
a frequency in the VHF or UHF TV bands appears on the LCD.
2. Rotate the DIAL to select the desired station.
Remember that the Wide-FM Squelch setting may be
made independently from the Narrow-FM setting, ad-
just the Wide-FM Squelch setting by pressing the [F/W]
key, followed by the MONI switch while in the Wide-FM mode. See page 13 for details.
OPERATION
USA Version
EXP Version
VHF TV Band
UHF TV Band
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 20
Now that you’re mastered the basics of VX-6R operation, let’s learn more about some of
the really neat features.
KEYBOARD LOCKING
In order to prevent accidental frequency change or inadvertent transmission, various as-
pects of the VX-6R’s DIAL and keypad may be locked out. The possible lockout combina-
tions are:
KEY: Just the front panel keypad is locked out
DIAL: Just the top panel DIAL is locked out
K+D: Both the keypad and DIAL are locked out (factory default)
PTT: The PTT switch is locked out (TX not possible)
K+P: Both the keypad and PTT switch are locked out
D+P: Both the DIAL and PTT switch are locked out
ALL: All of the above are locked out
To lock out some or all of the keys:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 35: LOCK.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to choose between one of the locking
schemes as outlined above.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and return to normal operation.
To activate the locking feature, press and hold in the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key for 2 seconds. The “ ” icon will ap-
pear on the LCD. To cancel locking, repeat this process.
ADVANCED OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 21
ADJUSTING THE KEYPAD BEEPER VOLUME LEVEL
A keypad beeper provides useful audible feed back whenever a keypad is pressed. The
keypad beeper level changes according to the VOL konb setting. However, you may adjust
the volume balance between the receiving audio and keypad beeper via the Set mode.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 9: BP LVL.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired level.
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to nor-
mal operation.
Additionally, if you want to turn the beep off:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 7: BEEP.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to change the setting to “OFF.”
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to nor-
mal operation.
6. To turn the beep back on again, select “ON” in step 4 above.
KEYPAD/LCD ILLUMINATION
Your VX-6R includes a reddish illumination lamp which aids in nighttime operation. The
reddish illumination yields clear viewing of the display in a dark environment, with mini-
mal degradation of your night vision.
Three options for activating the lamp are provided:
KEY Mode: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD for 5 seconds when any key pressed.
CONT Mode: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD continuously.
OFF Mode: Disables the Keypad/LCD lamp.
Here is the procedure for setting up the Lamp operating mode:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 33: LAMP.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select one of the three modes described
above.
5. When you have made your choice, press the PTT switch to save
the new setting and return to normal operation.
ADVANCED OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 22
CHANGING THE CHANNEL STEPS
The VX-6R’s synthesizer provides the option of utilizing channel steps of 5/10/12.5/15/
20/25/50/100 kHz per step, as well as an automatic step selection based on the current
operating frequency (“AUTO”), any number of which may be important to your operating
requirements. The VX-6R is set up at the factory in the “AUTO” configuration, which
probably is satisfactory for most operation. However, if you need to change the channel
step increments, the procedure to do so is very easy.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
1
(
STEP
)]
key. This pro-
vides a “Short-cut” to Set Mode Item 61: STEP.
2. Rotate the DIAL to select the new channel step size.
3. Press the PTT key to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
1) 9 kHz steps are available only when receiving on the BC band.
2) While operating on the BC band, you may only select channel steps of 9
kHz or 10 kHz; the other step selections are disabled.
3) 5 kHz and 15 kHz steps are not available for use on 250 - 300 MHz, nor above 580
MHz.
CHANGING THE RECEIVING MODE
The VX-6R provides for automatic receiving mode chang-
ing when the radio is tuned to different operating frequen-
cies. However, should an unusual receiving situation arise
in which you need to change other receiving mode, just press
the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key. The receiving modes
available are:
AUTO: Automatic mode setting per default values for
the selected frequency range.
FM: Frequency Modulation for receiving an Amateur Radio Station and most VHF/
UHF Communication.
WFM: Frequency Modulation for receiving an FM Broadcast Station.
AM: Amplitude Modulation for receiving a Short-wave Broadcast Station and Air
Band Communication.
Unless you have a compelling reason to do so, leave the Automatic Mode
Selection feature on so as to save time and trouble when changing bands. If
you make a mode change for a particular channel or station, you can always
store that one channel into memory, as the mode setting will be memorized along with
the frequency information.
ADVANCED OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 23
ADVANCED OPERATION
RF SQUELCH
A special RF Squelch feature is provided on this radio. This feature allows you to set the
squelch so that only signals exceeding a certain S-meter level will open the squelch.
To set up the RF squelch circuit for operation, use the following procedure:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 50: RF SQL.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired signal strength level
for the squelch threshold (S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, S9,
S9+, or OFF).
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation.
CHECKING THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
The VX-6R’s microprocessor includes programming which will measure the current bat-
tery voltage.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 16: DC VLT.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to display the current DC
voltage being supplied.
Lit: FNB-80LI is in use.
Edc: An external DC source is in use.
4. Press and hold in the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key for 2 seconds to return to
normal operation.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 24
Repeater stations, usually located on mountaintops or other high locations, provide a dra-
matic extension of the communication range for low-powered hand-held or mobile trans-
ceivers. The VX-6R includes a number of features which make repeater operation simple
and enjoyable.
REPEATER SHIFTS
Your VX-6R has been configured, at the factory, for the repeater shifts customary in your
country. For the 144 MHz band shift will be 600 kHz and 222 MHz band (USA version
only) shift will be 1.6 MHz; on the 430 MHz band, the shift may be 1.6 MHz, 7.6 MHz, or
5 MHz (USA version).
Depending on the part of the band in which you are operating, the repeater shift may be
either downward
( )
or upward
( )
, and one
of these icons will appear at the top of the LCD
when repeater shifts have been enabled.
AUTOMATIC REPEATER SHIFT
(
ARS
)
The VX-6R provides a convenient Automatic Repeater Shift feature, which causes the
appropriate repeater shift to be applied automatically whenever you tune into the desig-
nated repeater sub-bands in your country. These sub-bands are shown below.
If the ARS feature does not appear to be working, you may have accidentally disabled it.
To re-enable ARS:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 4: ARS.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON.”
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and return to normal operation.
REPEATER OPERATION
EXP Version
USA Version
USA Version
USA Version
2-m
145.1 145.5
145.6 145.8
146.0 146.4 147.0 147.6 148.0
146.6 147.4
EXP Version 1
EXP Version 2
1.25 m -
70-cm
223.92
440.0
224.98
445.0 450.0
439.45 438.20
433.00 433.40
ARS-Repeater Subbands
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 25
REPEATER OPERATION
MANUAL REPEATER SHIFT ACTIVATION
If the ARS feature has been disabled, or if you need to set a repeater shift direction other
than that established by the ARS, you may set the direction of the repeater shift manually.
To do this:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
6
(
RPT
)]
key. This provides a “Short-cut” to Set
Mode Item 51: RPT.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired shift among “–RPT,”
“+RPT,” and “SIMP.”
3. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to save the new setting and
return to normal operation.
If you make a change in the shift direction, but still have Automatic Repeater
Shift still engaged (see previous section), when you change frequency (by
rotating the DIAL knob, for example) the ARS will over-ride your manual
setting of the shift direction. Turn ARS off if you do not wish this to happen.
Changing the Default Repeater Shifts
If you travel to a different region, you may need to change the default repeater shift so as to
ensure compatibility with local operating requirements.
To do this, follow the procedure below:
1. Set the VX-6R’s frequency to the band on which you wish to change the default re-
peater shift (144 MHz or 430 MHz Amateur Band).
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 56: SHIFT.
4. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the new repeater shift magnitude.
6. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and return to normal operation.
If you just have one “odd” split that you need to program, don’t change the
“default” repeater shifts using this Set Mode Item. Enter the transmit and
receive frequencies separately, as shown on page 34.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 26
Checking the Repeater Uplink (Input) Frequency
It often is helpful to be able to check the uplink (input) frequency of a repeater, to see if the
calling station is within direct (“Simplex”) range.
To do this, just press the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key. You’ll
notice that the display has shifted to the repeater uplink fre-
quency. Press the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key again to cause
operation to revert to normal monitoring of the repeater
downlink (output) frequency. While you are listening on the
input frequency to the repeater using the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key, the repeater offset icon will blink.
The configuration of this key may be set either to “RV” (for checking the
input frequency of a repeater), or “HM” (for instant switching to the “Home”
channel for the band you are operating on). To change the configuration of
this key, use Set Mode Item 28: HM/RV. See page 45.
REPEATER OPERATION
MANUAL REPEATER SHIFT ACTIVATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 27
CTCSS OPERATION
Many repeater systems require that a very-low-frequency audio tone be superimposed on
your FM carrier in order to activate the repeater. This helps prevent false activation of the
repeater by radar or spurious signals from other transmitters. This tone system, called
“CTCSS” (Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System), is included in your VX-6R, and is
very easy to activate.
CTCSS setup involves two actions: setting the Tone Mode and then setting of
the Tone Frequency. These actions are set up by using the [MODE(SP S)
SQ TYP] key and [2(CODE)] key.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to enable selection
of the CTCSS/DCS mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob so that the “TONE” indication appears on
the display; this activates the CTCSS Encoder, for access to re-
peaters requiring a CTCSS tone.
3. Rotation of the DIAL knob one more “click” in step “2” above will cause the “T SQL”
notation to appear. When “T SQL” is displayed, this means that the Tone SQueLch
system is active, which mutes your VX-6R’s receiver until it receives a call from
another radio sending out a matching CTCSS tone. This can help
keep your radio quiet until a specific call is received, which may
be helpful while operating in congested areas of the band.
1
)
You may notice a “RV TN” indication on the display while you rotate
the DIAL knob in this step; this means that the Reverse Tone Squelch
system is active, which mutes your VX-6R’s receiver (instead of opening
the squelch) when it receives a call from the radio sending a matched CTCSS tone.
The “ ” icon will blink on the display when the Reverse Tone Squelch system
is activated.
2
)
You may notice a “DCS” indication on the display while you rotate the DIAL
knob still more. We’ll discuss the Digital Code Squelch system shortly.
4. When you have made your selection of the CTCSS tone mode, press the PTT switch
to save the new setting.
5. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
2
(
CODE
)]
key to enable adjustment of
the CTCSS frequency.
6. Rotate the DIAL knob until the display
indicates the Tone Frequency you need to
be using (ask the re-
peater owner/op-
erator if you don’t
know the tone frequency).
CTCSS/DCS OPERATION
CTCSS TONE FREQUENCY
(
Hz
)
67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7
82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4
100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8
123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2
151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9
171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2
189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5
210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8
250.3 254.1 – – – –
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 28
CTCSS/DCS OPERATION
CTCSS OPERATION
7. When you have made your selection, press the
[
2
(
CODE
)]
key momentarily to save
the new settings and exit to normal operation. This is different
than the usual method of restoring normal operation, and it ap-
plies only to the configuration of the CTCSS/DCS frequencies.
Your repeater may or may not re-transmit a CTCSS tone - some systems just
use CTCSS to control access to the repeater, but don’t pass it along when
transmitting. If the S-Meter deflects, but the VX-6R is not passing audio,
repeat steps “1” through “4” above, but rotate the DIAL so that “TONE” appears - this
will allow you to hear all traffic on the channel being utilized.
DCS OPERATION
Another form of tone access control is Digital Code Squelch, or DCS. It is a newer, more
advanced tone system which generally provides more immunity from false paging than
does CTCSS. The DCS Encoder/Decoder is built into your VX-6R, and operation is very
similar to that just described for CTCSS. Your repeater system may be configured for
DCS; if not, DCS is frequently quite useful in Simplex operation if your friend(s) use
transceivers equipped with this advanced feature.
Just as in CTCSS operation, DCS requires that you set the Tone Mode to DCS and that
you select a tone code.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
1
(
SQ TYP
)]
key to enable selection of the CTCSS/
DCS mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob until the “DCS” indication appears on the
display; this activates the DCS Encoder/Decoder.
3. Press the PTT key to save the new setting.
4. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
2
(
CODE
)]
key to enable
adjustment of the DCS code.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired DCS Code (a three-
digit number). Ask the repeater owner/op-
erator if you don’t know DCS Code; if
you are working simplex, just set up the
DCS Code to be the same as that used by
your friend(s).
6. When you have made your selection, press
the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to save the
new settings and exit
to normal operation.
DCS CODE
023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 051 053
054 065 071 072 073 074 114 115 116 122
125 131 132 134 143 145 152 155 156 162
165 172 174 205 212 223 225 226 243 244
245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271
274 306 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351
356 364 365 371 411 412 413 423 431 432
445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503
506 516 523 526 532 546 565 606 612 624
627 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731
732 734 743 754 – – – – – –
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 29
Remember that the DCS is an Encode/Decode system, so your receiver will
remain muted until a matching DCS code is received on an incoming trans-
mission. Switch the DCS off when you’re just tuning around the band!
DCS CODE INVERSION
The DCS system was first introduced in the commercial LMR (Land Mobile Radio) ser-
vice, where it is now in widespread use. DCS is sometime referred to by its different propri-
etary names, such as DPL
®
(Digital Private Line
®
, a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc.).
DCS uses a codeword consisting of a 23-bit frame, transmitted (subaudible) at a data rate
of 134.4 bps (bit/sec). Occasionally, signal inversion can result in the complement of a
code to be sent or received. This prevents the receiver’s squelch from opening with DCS
enabled, as the decoded bit sequence would not match that selected for operation.
Typical situations that might cause inversion to occur are:
Connection of an external receiver preamplifier.
Operating through a repeater.
Connection of an external linear amplifier.
Note that code inversion does not mean that any of the above listed equipment is defective!
In certain amplifier configurations, the output signal (phase) is inverted from the input.
Small signal or power amplifiers having an odd number (1, 3, 5, etc.) of amplification
stages may result in inversion of a transmitted or received DCS code.
While under most circumstances this should not occur (amplifier designs and industry
standards take this into account), if you find that your receiver squelch does not open when
both you and the other station are using a common DCS code, you or the other station (but
not both) can try the following:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 18: DCS RV.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily, then rotate the DIAL knob
to set this Set Mode Item to “ENABLE” (thus inverting the DCS
Code).
4. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
5. Remember to restore the default setting to “DISABLE” when done.
DCS OPERATION
CTCSS/DCS OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 30
CTCSS/DCS BELL OPERATION
During CTCSS Decode or DCS operation, you may set up the VX-6R such that a ringing
“bell” sound alerts you to the fact that a call is coming in. Here is the procedure for activat-
ing the CTCSS/DCS Bell:
1. Set the transceiver up for CTCSS Decode (“Tone Squelch”) or DCS operation, as
described previously.
2. Adjust the operating frequency to the desired channel.
3. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 8: BELL.
5. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
6. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the desired number of rings of the
Bell. The available choices are “1,” “3,” “5,” or “8” rings,
“CONT” (continuous ringing), or “OFF.”
7. Press the PTT switch momentarily to save the new setting and exit to normal opera-
tion.
When you are called by a station whose transceiver is sending a CTCSS tone or DCS code
which matches that set into your Decoder, the Bell will ring in accor-
dance with this programming. When the CTCSS/DCS Bell is acti-
vated, the “ ” icon will appear at the upper right corner on the
LCD.
CTCSS/DCS OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 31
CTCSS/DCS OPERATION
TONE SEARCH SCANNING
In operating situations where you don’t know the CTCSS or DCS tone being used by
another station or stations, you can command the radio to listen to the incoming signal and
scan in search of the tone being used. Two things must be remembered in this regard:
You must be sure that your repeater uses the same tone type (CTCSS vs. DCS).
Some repeaters do not pass the CTCSS tone; you may have to listen to the station(s)
transmitting on the repeater uplink (input) frequency in order to allow Tone Search
Scanning to work.
To scan for the tone in use:
1. Set the radio up for either CTCSS or DCS Decoder operation (see the previous discus-
sions). In the case of CTCSS, “ ” will appear on the display; in the case of DCS,
“ ” will appear on the display.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
2
(
CODE
)]
key.
3. Press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one sec-
ond to start scanning for the incoming CTCSS or DCS tone/code.
4. When the radio detects the correct tone or code, it will halt on
that tone/code, and audio will be allowed to pass. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to lock in that tone/code, then press
the
[
F/W
]
key to exit to normal operation.
If the Tone Scan feature does not detect a tone or code, it will continue to
scan indefinitely. When this happens, it may be that the other station is not
sending any tone. You can press the PTT switch to halt the scan at any time.
You may listen to the (muted) signal from the other station during Tone Scanning when Set
Mode Item 68: TS MUT is set to “OFF.” See page 102 for details. You can also change the
Tone Search scanning speed, using Set Mode Item 69: TS SPD.” See page 102.
Tone Scanning works either in the VFO or Memory modes.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 32
SPLIT TONE OPERATION
The VX-6R can be operated in a Split Tone configuration via the Set mode.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 58: SPLIT.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select ON (to enable the Split Tone
feature).
5. Press the PTT key momentarily to save the new setting and exit
to normal operation.
When the Split Tone feature is activated, you can see the following additional parameters
following the “RV TN” parameter (while selecting the tone mode by pressing
[
F/W
]

[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
])
:
D CODE: DCS Encode only (the “ ” icon will blink during operation)
T DCS: Encodes a CTCSS Tone and Decodes a DCS code
(the “ ” icon will blink and the “ ” icon will appear during operation)
D TONE: Encodes a DCS code and Decodes a CTCSS Tone
(the “ ” icon will appear and the “ ” icon will blink during opera-
tion)
Select the desired operating mode, from the selections shown above.
TONE CALLING
(
1750 HZ
)
If the repeaters in your country require a 1750-Hz burst tone for access (typically in Eu-
rope), you can set the MONI switch to serve as a “Tone Call” switch instead. To change the
configuration of this switch, we again use the Set Mode to help us.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 36: M/T-CL.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “T-CALL” on the display.
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
To access a repeater, press and hold in the MONI switch for the amount of time specified
by the repeater owner/operator. The transmitter will automatically be activated, and a 1750-
Hz audio tone will be superimposed on the carrier. Once access to the repeater has been
gained, you may release the MONI switch, and use the PTT switch for activating the
transmitter thereafter.
CTCSS/DCS OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 33
MEMORY MODE
The VX-6R provides a wide variety of memory system resources. These include:
Regular Memory Channels, which made up of:
900 “Standard” memory channels, numbered “1” through “900.”
99 “Frequency Skip Memory” channels, numbered “901” through “999.”
11 “Home” channels, providing storage and quick recall of one prime frequency
on each operating band.
50 sets of band-edge memories, also known as “Programmable Memory Scan”
channels, labeled “L1/U1” through “L50/U50.”
24 Memory Banks, labeled “BANK 1” through “BANK24.” Each Memory Bank can
be assigned up to 100 channels from the “standard” and “PMS” memory channels.
Special Memory Channels, which include:
A “Emergency Automatic ID (EAI)” Channel.
10 “Direct Memory Recall” Channels.
10 “Weather Broadcast” Channels.
89 Popular Short-wave Broadcast Station Memory Channels.
281 VHF Marine Channels.
A
c
t
i
o
n

B
a
n
d
-
2
U
H
F
-
T
V

B
a
n
d
4
3
0

M
H
z

B
a
n
d
A
c
t
i
o
n

B
a
n
d
-
1
V
H
F
-
T
V

B
a
n
d
1
4
4

M
H
z

B
a
n
d
A
i
r

B
a
n
d
F
M

B
C

B
a
n
d
5
0

M
H
z

B
a
n
d
S
W

B
a
n
d
B
C

B
a
n
d
HOME Channels
(11 channels)
VHF Marine Channels
(280 channels)
Short-wave Broadcast Station
Memory Channels
(89 channels)
9
0
0
8
8
9
4
3
2
1
9
0
3
9
0
2
9
0
1
9
0
0
9
9
9
9
9
8
L
5
0
/
U
5
0
L
4
9
/
U
4
9
L
4
/
U
4
L
3
/
U
3
L
2
/
U
2
L
1
/
U
1
Standard Memory Channels
(900 channels)
Frequency Skip Memory Channels
(99 channels)
PMS Memory Channels
(50 Sets)
Weather Broadcast Channels
(10 channels)
Direct Memory Recall Channels
(10 channels)
W
X
1
0
W
X
9
W
X
4
W
X
3
W
X
2
W
X
1
E
A
I
D
M
R

0
D
M
R

9
D
M
R

4
D
M
R

3
D
M
R

2
D
M
R

1
EAI Channel
(1 channel)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 34
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
MEMORY STORAGE
1. Select the desired frequency, while operating in the VFO mode. Be sure to set up any
desired CTCSS or DCS tones, as well as any desired repeater offset. The power level
may also be set at this time, if you wish to store it.
2. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second.
3. Within five seconds of releasing the
[
F/W
]
key, you need to make a decision regarding
channel storage. The microprocessor will automatically select the next-available “free”
channel (a memory register on which no data has been stored), so you may not wish to
make any change; if this is the case, proceed to step 4.
If you wish to select a different channel number into which to store the data, rotate the
DIAL knob to select the desired memory channel. If you see a blinking memory chan-
nel number, it means that the channel currently has no data written on it (i.e. the chan-
nel is “free”).
4. Press the
[
F/W
]
key once more to store the frequency into memory.
5. You still will be operating in the “VFO” mode, so you may now enter other frequen-
cies, and store them into additional memory locations, by repeating the above process.
1) You may change the automatic memory channel selection feature to select
the “next-highest memory channel above the last-stored memory channel”
by instead of the “next-available ‘free’ channel” via the Set Mode Item 38:
MW MD; see page 97.
2) In step 4 above, you may jump 100 memory channels, if you’re in a hurry (101 201
301 …) by pressing the [P(DMR)] key (multiple times, if necessary). Similarly, if you
wish to store to the designated memory channel, an easy way to designated memory is to
key in the memory channel number, then press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. For example, to
designate memory channel #14, press [1] [4] [V/M(DW)MT]. You may also desig-
nate the Memory Channel #000 and Programmable Memory channels (“L1/U1” through
“L50/U50”) using the following numbers: Memory Channel #000 = “1000,” Program-
mable Memory channels #L1 = “1001,” U1 = “1002,” L50 = “1099,” and U50 = “1100.”
In this case, you does not need pressing the [V/M(DW)MT] key.
Storing Independent Transmit Frequencies (“Odd Splits”)
All memories can store an independent transmit frequency, for operation on repeaters with
non-standard shift. To do this:
1. Store the receive frequency (downlink) using the method already described under
MEMORY STORAGE (it doesn’t matter if a repeater offset is active).
2. Turn to the desired transmit (uplink) frequency, then press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key
for one second.
3. Within five seconds of releasing the
[
F/W
]
key, rotate the DIAL knob to select the
same memory channel number as used in step “1” above.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 35
4. Press and hold in the PTT switch, then press the
[
F/W
]
key once more momentarily
while holding the PTT switch in (this does not key the transmitter).
Whenever you recall a memory which contains indepen-
dently-stored transmit and receive frequencies, the
“ ” indication will appear in the display.
MEMORY RECALL
1. While operating in the VFO mode, press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key
to enter the Memory mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired channel.
3. To return to the VFO mode, press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key.
When the radio is already set to the Memory mode, an easy way to recall memories is to
key in the memory channel number, then press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key.
For example, to recall memory channel #14, press
[
1
]

[
4
]

[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
.
You may also recall Memory Channel #000 and Programmable Memory channels (“L01/
U01” through “L50/U50”) using the following numbers: Memory Channel #000 = “1000,”
Programmable Memory channels #L1 = “1001,” U1 = “1002,” L50 = “1099,” and U50 =
“1100.” In these case, you do not need to press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
] key.
LABELING MEMORIES
You may wish to append an alpha-numeric “Tag” (label) to a memory or memories, to aid
in recollection of the channel’s use (such as a club name, etc.). This is easily accomplished
using the Set Mode.
1. Recall the memory channel on which you wish to append a label.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set
mode.
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 40: NM SET.
4. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable programming of
the name tag.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired label.
6. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to move to the next char-
acter.
7. If you make a mistake, press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to
back-space the cursor, then re-enter the correct letter, number, or
symbol.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to program the remaining letters, numbers, or symbols of the
MEMORY STORAGE
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 36
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
desired label. A total of six characters may be used in the cre-
ation of a label.
9. When you have programmed a label which is under 6 characters,
press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to confirm the label.
10. When you have completed the creation of the label, press the PTT key to save the
label and exit.
To display the alpha-numeric “Tag” (label):
1. Set the VX-6R to the “MR” (Memory Recall) mode, and recall
the memory channel on which you wish to display its label.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set
mode.
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Set Mode Item labeled 39:
NAME.
4. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Item’s setting.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ALPHA”
(thus enabling the alpha-numeric display).
6. Press the PTT key to save the new setting and activate the alpha-
numeric Tag.
To disable the alpha-numeric Tag (enabling the frequency display), just repeat the above
procedure, rotating the DIAL knob to select “FREQ” in step 5 above.
You may check the frequency of any Name-tagged channel by pressing the
MONI switch. Release the MONI switch, and the display returns to the al-
pha-numeric “Tag” display.
LABELING MEMORIES
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 37
MEMORY OFFSET TUNING
Once you have recalled a particular memory channel, you may easily tune off that channel,
as though you were in the “VFO” mode.
1. With the VX-6R in the “MR” (Memory Recall) mode, select the
desired memory channel.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key to acti-
vate the “Memory Tuning” feature. The Memory Channel num-
ber will be replaced by “tun.” And if you have an alpha-numeric
Tag displayed on the memory channel, the display will automati-
cally revert to display of the operating frequency, so you can
navigate without having to enter the Menu to change the display
configuration.
3. Rotate the DIAL knob, as desired, to tune to a new frequency.
The synthesizer steps selected for VFO operation on the current
band will be the steps used during Memory Tuning.
4. If you wish to return to the original memory frequency, just press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key momentarily. The display will revert to display of the alpha-numeric Tag (if any)
that may have originally appeared on the LCD.
5. If you wish to store a new frequency set during Memory Tuning, just press and hold in
the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, per normal memory storage procedure. The micropro-
cessor will automatically set itself to the next-available clear memory location, and
you then press
[
F/W
]
again to lock in the new frequency.
1) If you want to replace the original memory contents with those of the new
frequency, be sure to rotate the DIAL knob to the original memory channel
number!
2) Any required CTCSS/DCS changes, or repeater offset modifications, must be done
before storing the data into the new (or original) memory channel location.
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 38
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
MOVING MEMORY DATA TO THE VFO
Data stored on memory channels can easily be moved to the VFO, if you like.
1. Select the memory channel containing the frequency data to be moved to the VFO.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key to activate the “Memory Tune”
feature temporarily, then press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key.
The data will now have been copied to the VFO, although the original memory con-
tents will remain intact on the previously-stored channel.
If a Split Frequency Memory channel was transferred, the TX frequency will be ignored
(you will be set up for Simplex operation on the Receive frequency).
MASKING MEMORIES
There may be situations where you want to “Mask” memories so they are not visible during
memory selection or scanning. For example, several memories used only in a city you visit
infrequently may be stored, then “Masked” until you visit that city, at which time you can
“Unmask” them for normal use.
1. Press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, if needed, to enter the MR mode.
2. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, then rotate the DIAL knob to select the
memory channel to be “Masked.”
3. Press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key momentarily. The display will revert to memory chan-
nel #1. The previously-selected memory will be Masked.
4. To Unmask the hidden memory, repeat the above procedure: press and hold in the
[
F/
W
]
key for one second, rotate the DIAL to select the masked memory’s number, then
press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key to restore the memory channel’s data.
Watch out! You can manually store data over a “Masked” memory, deleting
previous data, if you’re not careful. Use the “next available memory” tech-
nique (look for the blinking memory channel number) storage technique to
avoid over-writing a masked memory.
MEMORY ONLY MODE
Once memory channel programming has been completed, you may place the radio in a
“Memory Only” mode, whereby VFO operation is impossible. This may be particularly
useful during public-service events, where a number of operators may be using the radio
for first time, and ultimate simplicity of channel selection is desired.
To place the radio into the Memory Only mode, turn the radio off. Now, press and hold in
the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key while turning the radio on. To return to normal operation, repeat
the above power-on procedure.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 39
HOME CHANNEL MEMORY
A special one-touch “HOME” channel is available for each of operating bands, to allow
quick recall of a favorite operating frequency on each band.
Home Channel storage is simple to accomplish:
1. Change the setting of Set Mode Item 28: HM/RV from “REV” to “HOME,” if it is not
already set to this option (see page 95).
2. Select the desired frequency, while operating in the VFO mode. Be sure to set up any
desired CTCSS or DCS tones, as well as any desired repeater offset. The power level
may also be set at this time, if you wish to store it.
3. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second.
4. While the memory channel number is blinking, just press the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key. The frequency and other data (if any) will now be stored in the special HOME
channel register.
5. You may repeat this process on the other operating bands.
6. To recall the HOME channel, press the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key momentarily
while operating either in the VFO or MR
mode.
The UHF HOME
channel is the one
used during “Emer-
gency Channel Operation.” See
page 62 for details regarding
this feature.
BAND
DEFAULT HOME CHANNEL FREQUENCY
USA VERSION EXP VERSION
BC Band 0.540 MHz 0.540 MHz
SW Band 1.800 MHz 1.800 MHz
50 MHz Ham Band 30.000 MHz 30.000 MHz
FM BC Band 59.000 MHz 88.000 MHz
Air Band 108.000 MHz 108.000 MHz
144 MHz Ham Band 146.520 MHz 144.000 MHz
VHF-TV Band 174.000 MHz 174.000 MHz
222 MHz Ham Band 222.000 MHz 230.000 MHz
430 MHz Ham Band 446.000 MHz 430.000 MHz
UHF-TV Band 470.000 MHz 470.000 MHz
Action Band 860.000 MHz 860.000 MHz
USA Version EXP Version
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 40
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
MEMORY BANK OPERATION
The large number of memories available in the VX-6R could be difficult to utilize without
some means of organizing them. Fortunately, the VX-6R includes provision for dividing
the memories into as many as 24 Memory Banks, so you can categorize the memories in a
manner convenient to you. You may enter and exit the “Memory Bank” mode by a single
press of the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key, as we shall see below.
Assigning Memories to a Memory Bank
1. Recall the memory channel to be assigned to a Memory Bank.
2. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, then rotate the
DIAL knob to select the Memory Bank number (“b 1” ~ “b24”)
you want as the Memory Bank for this channel.
3. Here’s a short cut for choosing the desired Memory Bank: press
and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, then enter the follow-
ing numbers: 1101 (for Memory Bank
“b1”) through 1124 (for Memory
Bank “b24”).
4. Press the
[
F/W
]
key to copy the
memory channel data into the Memory
Bank.
1) You may assi gn one
memory channel into several Memory Banks.
2) The PMS memory channels (L1/U1 through L50/U50) may not be as-
signed to a Memory Bank.
Memory Bank Recall
1. Press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, if needed, to enter the Memory mode.
2. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to activate the “Memory
Bank” mode. The Memory Bank number will appear on the dis-
play.
3. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key, then rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired Memory
Bank (“BANK 1” through “BANK24”).
4. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key momentarily once more;
now, as you rotate the DIAL knob to select memories, you will
observe that you can only select memory channels in the current
memory bank. The small memory bank number will appear at the above of the fre-
quency display while operating within a Memory Bank.
5. To change to another Memory Bank, press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
] key
, rotate the DIAL knob to select the new Memory Bank,
Memory Channel
CH 1 145.000 MHz
CH 2 145.500 MHz
CH 3 435.000 MHz
CH 4 435.500 MHz
CH 5 145.800 MHz
CH 6 436.000 MHz
CH 7 128.800 MHz
CH 897 145.620 MHz
CH 898 436.780 MHz
CH 899 128.600 MHz
Memory Bank “5”
Air Band Channels
Memory Bank “4”
Club Channels
Memory Bank “3”
All Amateur Band Channels
Memory Bank “1”
144 MHz Amateur Band Channels
Memory Bank “2”
430 MHz Amateur Band Channels
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 41
then press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key momentarily.
6. To exit from Memory Bank operation, just press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
] key
.
“MEMORY” will appear on the display, indicating that you are now in the “standard”
Memory Recall mode, without utilization of the Memory Banks. The memories stored
in the various Banks will remain in those banks, however; you do not need to store
them again.
Removing Memories from a Memory Bank
1. Recall the memory channel to be removed from a Memory Bank.
2. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, then press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key to
remove the memory channel data from the Memory Bank.
Changing a Memory Bank’s Name
You may change the default Memory Bank Name which is indicates on the display while
selecting the Memory Bank to your desired name.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 10: BNK NM.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily, then rotate the DIAL knob
to recall the memory bank on which you wish to change a label.
4. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to enable changing of
the name tag.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired label.
6. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to move to the next char-
acter.
7. If you make a mistake, press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to
back-space the cursor, then re-enter the correct letter, number, or symbol.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to program the remaining letters, num-
bers, or symbols of the desired label. A total of six characters
may be used in the creation of a label.
9. When you have programmed a name which is under 6 characters, press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to confirm the label.
10. When you have completed the changing of the name, press the PTT key to save the
label and exit.
MEMORY BANK OPERATION
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 42
DIRECT MEMORY RECALL CHANNEL
The Direct Memory Recall Channel (DMR) feature allows you to recall up to ten favorite
frequencies directly via the numeric
([
0
]
through
[
9
])
keys. DMR channels may be se-
lected from the VFO, an already-programmed memory, or a Home channel.
Storing the “Direct Memory Recall” Channels
1. Set up the transceiver frequency according to the desired configuration, including pa-
rameters such as CTCSS/DCS data, Repeater Shift, Power Level etc.
2. Press and hold in the numeric
([
0
]
through
[
9
])
key, corresponding to the Direct Memory
Recall Channel into which you wish to store this configuration, for 2 seconds.
3. You still will be operating in the “normal” mode (Memory, VFO, or Home Channel),
so you may now select other frequency, and store them into additional Direct Memory
Recall Channels, by repeating the above process.
Recalling the “Direct Memory Recall” Channels
1. Press and hold in the
[
P
(
DMR
)]
key for 2 seconds to recall the
Direct Memory Recall Channel mode. The “ ” icon will ap-
pear at the upper left corner of the display while operating on a
Direct Memory Recall Channel.
2. Press the numeric
([
0
]
through
[
9
])
key corresponding to the Direct Memory Recall
Channel you wish to recall.
3. Once you have recalled a DMR channel, you may
rotate the DIAL knob to change frequencies, as
though you were operating on the VFO.
4. If you wish to over-write the data stored on a par-
ticular DMR channel after tuning off of the original
frequency, just press and hold in (for 2 seconds) the
numeric key which was pressed in step 2.
5. To exit the Direct Memory Recall Channel mode,
press and hold in the
[
P
(
DMR
)]
key for 2 seconds.
DEFAULT DMR CHANNEL FREQUENCY
KEY
[
1
]
[
2
]
[
3
]
[
4
]
[
5
]
[
6
]
[
7
]
[
8
]
[
9
]
[
0
]
USA VERSION
145.000
MHz
146.520 MHz
147.500 MHz
435.000 MHz
440.000 MHz
446.000 MHz
222.000 MHz
0.540 MHz
88.000 MHz
120.000
MHz
EXP VERSION
144.500
MHz
145.000 MHz
145.500 MHz
430.000 MHz
435.000 MHz
439.000 MHz
0.540 MHz
7.000 MHz
88.000 MHz
120.000
MHz
MEMORY MODE
(
REGULAR MEMORY CHANNELS
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 43
MEMORY MODE
(
SPECIAL MEMORY CHANNELS
)
SHORT-WAVE BROADCAST STATION MEMORY CHANNELS
A large number of Short-Wave Broadcast Station Memory Channels have also been pre-
programmed at the factory, for convenient selection of broadcast stations.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
9
(
SP BNK
)]
key, to recall the Special Memory
Channel Bank.
2. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to select “RADIO” (thus
recalling the Broadcast Station Channel Memory Bank).
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select any of the 89 available Broadcast
Stations.
4. You may view the channel frequency temporarily using Set Mode
Item 36: NAME (set its parameter to “FREQ”).
5. To exit to normal operation, press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, or
press the
[
F/W
]
key followed by the
[
9
(
SP BNK
)]
key.
BROADCAST STATION FREQUENCY LIST
Ch
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Freq.
(MHz)
6.030
6.160
9.760
11.930
5.995
7.235
9.735
11.955
6.195
9.410
12.095
15.310
6.045
9.790
11.670
15.525
3.955
6.075
9.545
9.735
6.060
7.175
9.515
17.710
3.985
6.165
9.885
15.220
5.985
9.925
11.780
13.740
5.955
6.020
9.895
11.655
9.590
9.985
13.800
15.735
9.780
11.960
15.555
21.655
MODE
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
Tag
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
CANADA
CANADA
CANADA
CANADA
BBC
BBC
BBC
BBC
FRANCE
FRANCE
FRANCE
FRANCE
DW
DW
DW
DW
ITALY
ITALY
ITALY
ITALY
SWISS
SWISS
SWISS
SWISS
BELGUM
BELGUM
BELGUM
BELGUM
NDELND
NDELND
NDELND
NDELND
DENMRK
DENMRK
DENMRK
DENMRK
PORTGL
PORTGL
PORTGL
PORTGL
Station Name
Voice of America
Voice of America
Voice of America
Voice of America
Radio Canada International
Radio Canada International
Radio Canada International
Radio Canada International
British Broadcasting Corporation
British Broadcasting Corporation
British Broadcasting Corporation
British Broadcasting Corporation
Radio France International
Radio France International
Radio France International
Radio France International
Deutsche Welle
Deutsche Welle
Deutsche Welle
Deutsche Welle
Italian Radio International
Italian Radio International
Italian Radio International
Italian Radio International
Swiss Radio International
Swiss Radio International
Swiss Radio International
Swiss Radio International
Radio Vlaanderen International
Radio Vlaanderen International
Radio Vlaanderen International
Radio Vlaanderen International
Radio Nederland
Radio Nederland
Radio Nederland
Radio Nederland
Radio Denmark
Radio Denmark
Radio Denmark
Radio Denmark
Radio Portugal
Radio Portugal
Radio Portugal
Radio Portugal
Ch
No.
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
MODE
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
AM
Freq.
(MHz)
7.270
9.520
11.920
15.585
6.090
7.485
9.590
9.985
13.800
6.065
9.490
13.625
17.505
6.120
9.630
11.755
9.795
5.940
5.920
7.205
12.030
9.435
11.585
15.615
17.545
6.045
9.595
11.620
15.020
7.190
5.250
9.855
11.685
5.975
7.275
9.570
13.670
6.155
7.200
9.750
11.850
5.995
9.580
9.660
12080
Tag
SPAIN
SPAIN
SPAIN
SPAIN
LUXBRG
NORWAY
NORWAY
NORWAY
NORWAY
SWEDEN
SWEDEN
SWEDEN
SWEDEN
FINLND
FINLND
FINLND
FINLND
RUSSIA
RUSSIA
RUSSIA
RUSSIA
ISRAEL
ISRAEL
ISRAEL
ISRAEL
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
CHINA
CHINA
CHINA
CHINA
KOREA
KOREA
KOREA
KOREA
JAPAN
JAPAN
JAPAN
JAPAN
ASTRLA
ASTRLA
ASTRLA
ASTRLA
Station Name
Radio Exterior de Espana
Radio Exterior de Espana
Radio Exterior de Espana
Radio Exterior de Espana
Radio Luxembourg
Radio Norway International
Radio Norway International
Radio Norway International
Radio Norway International
Radio Sweden
Radio Sweden
Radio Sweden
Radio Sweden
Radio Finland
Radio Finland
Radio Finland
Radio Finland
Voice of Russia
Voice of Russia
Voice of Russia
Voice of Russia
Israel Broadcasting Authority
Israel Broadcasting Authority
Israel Broadcasting Authority
Israel Broadcasting Authority
All India Radio (AIR)
All India Radio (AIR)
All India Radio (AIR)
All India Radio (AIR)
China Radio International (CRI)
China Radio International (CRI)
China Radio International (CRI)
China Radio International (CRI)
Radio Korea
Radio Korea
Radio Korea
Radio Korea
Radio Japan
Radio Japan
Radio Japan
Radio Japan
Radio Australia
Radio Australia
Radio Australia
Radio Australia
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 44
MEMORY MODE
(
SPECIAL MEMORY CHANNELS
)
CH
01
02
03
04
05
CH
06
07
08
09
10
FREQUENCY
162.550 MHz
165.400 MHz
162.475 MHz
162.425 MHz
162.450 MHz
FREQUENCY
162.500 MHz
165.525 MHz
161.650 MHz
161.775 MHz
163.275 MHz
WEATHER BROADCAST CHANNELS
(
U. S. VERSION
)
The VHF Weather Broadcast Station Memory Channel Bank has been pre-programmed at
the factory, for quick selection of NOAA weather information stations.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
9
(
SP BNK
)]
key, to recall the Special Memory
Channel Bank.
2. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key, repeatedly if necessary
to select “WX CH” (thus recalling the Weather Broadcast
Memory Bank).
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired Weather Broadcast
channel.
4. If you wish to scan this bank to search for louder stations, just press
the PTT switch. When the scanner pauses on a sta-
tion, press the PTT key once to halt the scan; press
it once moore to restart the scan.
5. To exit to normal operation, press the
[
V/
M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, or press the
[
F/W
]
key followed
by the
[
9
(
SP BNK
)]
key.
Severe Weather Alert
In the event of extreme weather disturbances, such as severe thunderstorms and hurri-
canes, the NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration) sends a weather
alert accompanied by a 1050 Hz tone and subsequent weather report on one of the NOAA
weather channels. See page 55 for details regarding activation of this mode.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 45
VHF MARINE CHANNELS
Another special Memory Bank contains VHF Marine Channels, pre-programmed at the
factory, for quick selection.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
9
(
SP BNK
)]
key, to recall the Special Memory
Channel Bank.
2. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key, repeatedly if necessary,
to select “MARINE” (thus recalling the Marine Channel Memory
Bank).
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select any of the 280 available VHF
Marine Channels.
4. To exit to normal operation, press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, or
press the
[
F/W
]
key followed by the
[
9
(
SP BNK
)]
key.
VHF MARINE CHANNEL FREQUENCY LIST
Frequency
(
MHz
)
156.000
156.050
156.100
156.150
156.200
156.250
156.300
156.350
156.400
156.450
156.500
156.550
156.600
156.650
156.700
156.750
156.800
156.850
156.900
156.950
157.000
157.050
157.100
157.150
157.200
157.250
157.300
157.350
157.400
157.450
157.500
157.550
157.600
157.650
157.700
157.750
157.800
157.850
157.900
157.950
158.000
CH
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CH
No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Frequency
(
MHz
)
158.050
158.100
158.150
158.200
158.250
158.300
158.350
158.400
158.450
158.500
158.550
158.600
158.650
158.700
158.750
158.800
158.850
158.900
158.950
156.025
156.075
156.125
156.175
156.225
156.275
156.325
156.375
156.425
156.475
156.525
156.575
156.625
156.675
156.725
156.875
156.925
156.975
157.025
157.075
CH
No.
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
Frequency
(
MHz
)
159.075
159.100
159.125
159.150
159.175
159.200
159.225
159.250
159.275
159.300
159.325
159.350
159.375
159.400
159.425
159.450
159.475
159.500
159.525
159.550
159.575
159.600
159.625
159.650
159.675
159.700
159.725
159.750
159.775
159.800
159.825
159.850
159.875
159.900
159.925
159.950
159.975
160.000
160.025
160.050
160.075
CH
No.
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
Frequency
(
MHz
)
160.100
160.125
160.150
160.175
160.200
160.225
160.250
160.275
160.300
160.325
160.350
160.375
160.400
160.425
160.450
160.475
160.500
160.525
160.550
160.575
160.600
160.625
160.650
160.675
160.700
160.725
160.750
160.775
160.800
160.825
160.850
160.875
160.900
160.925
160.950
160.975
161.000
161.025
161.050
161.075
161.100
CH
No.
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
Frequency
(
MHz
)
155.875
155.850
155.825
155.800
155.775
155.750
155.725
155.700
155.675
155.650
155.625
155.600
155.575
155.550
155.525
155.500
155.475
155.450
155.425
155.400
155.375
155.350
155.325
155.300
155.275
155.250
155.225
155.200
155.175
155.150
155.125
155.100
155.075
155.050
155.025
155.000
Frequency
(
MHz
)
157.125
157.175
157.225
157.275
157.325
157.375
157.425
157.475
157.525
157.575
157.625
157.675
157.725
157.775
157.825
157.875
157.925
157.975
158.025
158.075
158.125
158.175
158.225
158.275
158.325
158.375
158.425
158.475
158.525
158.575
158.625
158.675
158.725
158.775
158.825
158.875
158.925
158.975
159.000
159.025
159.050
CH
No.
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
212
243
244
245
Frequency
(
MHz
)
161.125
161.150
161.175
161.200
161.225
161.250
161.275
161.300
161.325
161.350
161.375
161.400
161.425
161.450
161.475
161.500
161.525
161.550
161.575
161.600
161.625
161.650
161.675
161.700
161.725
161.750
161.775
161.800
161.825
161.850
161.875
161.900
161.925
161.950
161.975
162.000
162.025
155.975
155.950
155.925
155.900
CH
No.
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
MEMORY MODE
(
SPECIAL MEMORY CHANNELS
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 46
The VX-6R allows you to scan just the memory channels, the entire operating band, or a
portion of that band. It will halt on signals encountered, so you can talk to the station(s) on
that frequency, if you like.
Scanning operation is basically the same in each of the above modes. Before you begin,
take a moment to select the way in which you would like the scanner to resume scanning
after it halts on a signal.
Setting the Scan-Resume Technique
Three options for the Scan-Resume mode are available:
3 SEC/5 SEC/10 SEC: In this mode, the scanner will halt on a signal it encounters, and
will hold there for the selected resume time. If you do not take
action to disable the scanner within that time period, the scanner
will resume even if the stations are still active.
BUSY: In this mode, the scanner will halt on a signal it encounters. One
second after the carrier has dropped because the other station(s)
ceased transmission, the scanner will resume. In the case of con-
stant-carrier signals like Weather Station broadcasts, the scanner
will likely remain on this frequency indefinitely.
HOLD: In this mode, the scanner will halt on a signal it encounters. It will
not restart automatically; you must manually re-initiate scanning
if you wish to resume.
To set the Scan-Resume mode:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 49: RESUME.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired scan-resume mode.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save
the new setting and exit to normal operation.
The default condition for this Set Mode Item is “5 SEC.”
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 47
SCANNING
VFO SCANNING
1. Select the VFO mode by pressing the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, if necessary.
2. Press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one second, then rotate the
DIAL knob while holding the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to
select the bandwidth for the VFO scanner. Available selections
are ±1 MHz, ±2 MHz, ±5 MHz, ALL, PMS-X, and BAND.
±1 MHz, ±2 MHz, ±5 MHz: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the se-
lected bandwidth.
ALL: The scanner will sweep all frequencies.
PMS-X: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the cur-
rently-selected PMS frequency pair. See page 52 for
details.
Note: When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to
the Low sub-band limit memory channel, the alpha-
numeric “Tag” will appear while you are selecting
the bandwidth for the VFO scanner.
BAND: The scanner will sweep frequencies only on the cur-
rent band.
3. Release the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to start scanning.
4. If and when the scanner encounters a signal strong enough to open the squelch, the
scanner will halt temporarily; the decimal point of the frequency display will blink
during this “Pause” condition.
5. The scanner will then resume according to the Scan-Resume mode selected in the
previous section.
6. To cancel scanning, press the PTT switch or
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key.
: When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to the Low sub-band limit memory chan-
nel, the alpha-numeric “Tag” will appear while you are selecting the bandwidth for the
VFO scanner.
1) When you start the VFO Scanner, the VX-6R will be changing frequency
in the upward direction. If you want to change direction of the scan while it is
underway, rotate the DIAL knob one click in the opposite direction (in this
case, one click counter-clockwise). You’ll see the scanner turn around and change fre-
quency downward!
2) You may change the scanner’s method of operation so that the VFO frequency will jump
to the low band edge of the next band when the VFO frequency reaches the high edge of the
current band (or vice versa). See page 102 regarding Set Mode Item 71: VFO MD.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 48
Setting the Squelch Level during active Scanning Operation
The VX-6R allows adjustment of the Squelch level “on the fly” while you are scanning.
1. While the scanner is engaged, press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the MONI key (the
current squelch level (e.g. “S 1”) will appear in fine print
above the frequency display).
2. Rotate the DIAL to select the desired Squelch level.
3. Press the PTT switch momentarily to save the new setting
and exit to normal operation. In this case, pressing the PTT switch this one time will
not causing scanning to stop.
How to Skip (Omit) a Frequency during VFO Scan
If the VFO scan stops on a frequency or frequencies that you do not need (such as a spuri-
ous radiation from a television), such frequencies can be “skipped” during VFO scanning.
This accomplished by storing these frequencies in a special “Frequency Skip Memory”
bank reserved for this purpose.
To skip a frequency during VFO scanning:
1. While VFO scanning is stopped (“pause” state) on the frequency that you do not need,
press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, then rotate the DIAL knob to select the
desired Frequency Skip Memory channel (901 - 999). The microprocessor will
automatically select the next-available “free” Frequency Skip Memory channel (a
memory register on which no data has been stored). Any channel with a blinking chan-
nel number is one that currently has no data written on it (i.e. the channel is “free”).
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key to store the frequency into the Frequency Skip Memory; it now is
programmed to be ignored during VFO scanning.
The VX-6R has 99 VFO Frequency Skip Memory Channels.
To re-institute a frequency into the VFO scan loop:
1. Press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, if needed, to enter the MR mode.
2. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, then rotate the DIAL knob to select the
memory channel to be re-instituted.
3. Press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key to delete the channel from the Frequency Skip Memory;
this will re-institute the frequency into the VFO scan loop.
VFO SCANNING
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 49
MEMORY SCANNING
Memory scanning is similarly easy to initiate:
1. Set the radio to the Memory mode by pressing the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, if necessary.
2. Press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one second, and rotate the
DIAL knob while holding in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to select the desired
Memory Scan mode. Available selections are ALL CH, TAG1, TAG2, BAND, and
PMS-X.
ALL CH: The scanner sweeps all Memory channels.
TAG1: The scanner sweeps only those Memory channels with the same “first” digit
of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on which scanning started.
TAG2: The scanner sweeps only those Memory channels with the same “first” and
“second” digits of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on which scan-
ning started.
BAND: The scanner sweeps only those Memory channels which are memorized on
the same operating band as the first channel on which scanning started.
PMS-X: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the currently-selected PMS fre-
quency pair. See page 52 for details.
Note: When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to the Low sub-band limit
memory channel, the alpha-numeric “Tag” will appear while you are select-
ing the Memory Scan mode.
3. Release the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to initiate scanning.
4. As with VFO scanning, the scanner will halt on any signal encountered that is strong
enough to open the squelch; it will then resume scanning according to the Scan-Re-
sume mode set previously. When there are no memory channels
corresponding to the selected Memory Scan mode, the “MS
ERR” notation will appear on the display.
5. To cancel scanning, press the PTT switch or the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key.
How to Skip (Omit) a Channel during Memory Scan Operation
If the scanner repeatedly stops on a memory channel due to temporary noise or interfer-
ence, you can mark it to be skipped by pressing the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[
5
(
SKIP
)]
key while the scanner has stopped on the channel to be skipped. The scanner will instanta-
neously resume, and that channel will not be scanned henceforth.
As mentioned previously, some continuous-carrier stations like a Weather Broadcast sta-
tion will seriously impede scanner operation if you are using the “Carrier Drop” Scan-
Resume mode, as the incoming signal will not pause long enough for the transceiver to
resume scanning.
Here is the procedure for skipping certain memories during scanning:
1. Recall the Memory Channel to be skipped during scanning.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 50
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 57: SKIP.
4. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob so as to select “SKIP.” The current Memory
Channel will now be ignored during scanning. The “ONLY” se-
lection is used for “Preferential Memory Scan,” described in the
next section.
6. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save the setting and exit to
normal operation.
When you recall the “skipped” memory channel manually, a small
“” icon will appear at the left of the memory channel number, indi-
cating it is to be ignored during scanning. It is still available for recall
manually, however, using the DIAL knob or keyboard.
To re-institute a channel into the scanning loop, select “OFF” in step 5 above.
Preferential Memory Scan
The VX-6R also allows you to set up a “Preferential Scan List” of channels which you can
“flag” within the memory system. These channels are designated by a blinking “” icon
when you have selected them, one by one, for the Preferential Scan List.
Here is the procedure for setting up and using the Preferential Scan List:
1. Recall the Memory Channel which you wish to add to the Preferential Scan List.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 57: SKIP.
4. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob so as to select “ONLY.”
6. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save
the settings and exit to normal operation.
7. To remove a channel from the Preferential Scan List, just repeat
the above procedure, rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 5 above.
To initiate Preferential Memory Scan:
1. Press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key momentarily to enter the Memory Recall mode, if you
are not using memories already.
2. Rotate the DIAL to select any channel which has a blinking “” icon appended to the
channel number.
3. Press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one second, and rotate the DIAL
knob while holding in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to select the desired Memory
Scan mode. Available selections are ALL CH, TAG1, TAG2, BAND, and PMS-X.
MEMORY SCANNING
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 51
ALL CH: The scanner sweeps all Preferential Memory channels.
TAG1: The scanner sweeps only those Preferential Memory channels with same
“first” digit of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on which scanning
started.
TAG2: The scanner sweeps only those Preferential Memory channels with same
“first” and “second” digits of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on
which scanning started.
BAND: The scanner sweeps only those Preferential Memory channels which are
memorized on the same operating band as the first channel on which scan-
ning started.
PMS-X: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the currently-selected PMS fre-
quency pair. See page 52 for details.
Note: When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to the Low sub-band limit
memory channel, the alpha-numeric “Tag” will appear while you are select-
ing the Memory Scan mode.
4. Release the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to initiate Preferential Memory Scanning.
Only the channels which have a blinking “” icon appended to the channel number
will be scanned.
Memory Bank Scan
When the Memory Bank feature is engaged, the scanner sweeps only memory channels in
the current Memory Bank. However, if the Memory Bank Link Scan feature is enabled,
you may sweep the memory channels in several Memory Banks which you have selected.
To enable the Memory Bank Link Scan feature:
1. Set the radio to the Memory mode by pressing the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, if necessary.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to recall the Memory
Bank.
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first Memory Bank (“BANK 1” ~ “BANK24”) you
wish to sweep using Memory Bank Link Scan.
4. Press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key momentarily. A small blinking “”
icon will appear at the left of the Memory Bank number, indicat-
ing this Memory Bank will now be swept during Memory Bank
Scan.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 above, to append the blinking “” icon to any other Memory
Banks you wish to sweep.
6. Now, press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one second to initiate the
Memory Bank Link Scan.
7. To remove a Memory Bank from the Memory Bank Link Scan, repeat steps 2 and 3
above, to delete the blinking “” icon from the Memory Bank number indication.
MEMORY SCANNING
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 52
PROGRAMMABLE
(
BAND LIMIT
)
MEMORY SCAN
(
PMS
)
This feature allows you to set sub-band limits for either scanning or manual VFO opera-
tion. For example, you might wish to set up a limit (in North America) of 144.300 MHz to
148.000 MHz so as to prevent encroachment into the SSB/CW “Weak Signal” portion of
the band below 144.300 MHz. Here’s how to do this:
1. Set the radio to the VFO mode by pressing the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key, if necessary.
2. Using the techniques learned earlier, store (per the above concept) 144.300 MHz into
Memory Channel #L1 (the “L” designates the Lower sub-band limit).
3. Likewise, store 148.000 MHz into Memory Channel #U1 (the “U” designates the
Upper sub-band limit).
4. Press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one sec-
ond, and (while holding the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key in)
rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired PMS frequency pair
(PMSxx), then release the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key.
5. Releasing the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to initiates the Pro-
grammable (Band Limit) Memory Scan; the Memory Channel
number will be replaced by “Pxx.” Scanning and tuning will now be limited within the
just-programmed range.
6. 50 pairs of Band Limit memories, labeled L1/U1 through L50/U50 are available.
You therefore can set upper and lower operation limits in multiple segments on a
number of bands, if you like.
7. To exit from PMS operation, press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key.
Please be sure only to store limit frequencies which are on the same band and
set to the same frequency steps in both the upper and lower frequency limit
memories.
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 53
“PRIORITY CHANNEL” SCANNING
(
DUAL WATCH
)
The VX-6R’s scanning features include a two-channel scanning capability which allows
you to operate on a VFO or Memory channel, while periodically checking a user-defined
Memory Channel for activity. If a station is received on the Memory Channel which is
strong enough to open the Squelch, the scanner will pause on that station in accordance
with the Scan-Resume mode set via Set Mode Item 49: RESUME. See page 46.
Here is the procedure for activating Priority Channel Dual Watch operation:
1. Press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key momentarily to enter the Memory Recall mode, if you
are not using memories already. If you are operating within a Memory Bank, you must
exit from Memory Bank operation by pressing the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key mo-
mentarily.
2. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key for one second, then rotate the DIAL knob to select the
memory channel you wish to be the “Priority” channel.
3. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key. The “ ” icon will
appear to the left side of the memory channel number, indicating
it is the Priority channel while recalling the channel.
4 Now set the VX-6R for operation on another memory channel, Home channel, or on a
VFO frequency.
5. Press and hold in the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key for one second. The display will remain on
the VFO or memory channel selected; however, the “ ” icon
will appear on the display, and every five seconds the VX-6R
will check the Priority Channel for activity. If a station appears
on the Priority Channel, the radio will pause on that channel, as described previously.
6. To exit from Dual Watch, press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key momentarily
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 54
AUTOMATIC LAMP ILLUMINATION ON SCAN STOP
The VX-6R will automatically illuminate the LCD/Keypad Lamp whenever the scanner
stops on a signal; this allows you to see the frequency of the incoming signal better at night.
Note that this will, of course, increase the battery consumption, so be sure to switch it off
during the day (the default condition for this feature is “ON”).
The procedure for disabling the Scan Lamp is:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 55: SCN.LMP.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “OFF.”
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save
the setting and exit to normal operation.
BAND EDGE BEEPER
The VX-6R will automatically “beep” when a band edge is encountered during scanning
(either in standard VFO scanning or during PMS operation). You may also enable this
feature (band edge beeper) to sound the beeper when the frequency reaches the band edge
while tuning using the DIAL knob.
The procedure for enabling the Band-Edge Beeper is:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 25: EDG.BEP.
3. Press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON.”
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save
the setting and exit to normal operation.
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 55
WEATHER ALERT SCAN
This feature allows you to check the Weather Broadcast Memory Channels for the pres-
ence of the NOAA Alert Tone while operating using VFO scan or Memory channel scan.
When the Weather Alert Scan feature is engaged, the VX-6R will check the Weather Broad-
cast Memory Channels for activity every five seconds while scanning. If you watch the
display carefully, you’ll observe the scanner periodically shifting to the Weather Broadcast
bank, scanning the Weather channels quickly in search of the Alert Tone, after which regu-
lar scanning will resume for another five seconds.
To enable the Weather Alert Scan feature:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 73: WX ALT.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob so as to select “ON.”
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save
the setting and exit to normal operation.
6. To disable the Weather Alert Scan feature, select “OFF” in step 4 above.
1) When the Weather Alert Scan feature is engaged, the Scan-Resume mode
is fixed to “TIME.”
2) If you are just scanning the Weather Broadcast Channels, the VX-6R’s
receiver will remain muted indefinitely unless the Alert Tone is received. This yields a
long period of monitoring time, as no power will be consumed via audio output while
scanning for the Alert Tone is in progress.
SCANNING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 56
The Smart Search feature allows you to load frequencies automatically according to where
activity is encountered by your radio. When Smart Search is engaged, the transceiver will
search above and below your current frequency, storing active frequencies as it goes (with-
out stopping on them even momentarily); these frequencies are stored into a special Smart
Search memory bank, consisting of 31 memories (15 above the current frequency, 15 be-
low the current frequency, plus the current frequency itself).
Two basic operating modes for Smart Search are available:
SINGLE: In this mode, the transceiver will sweep the current band once in each direction
starting on the current frequency. All channels where activity is present will be
loaded into the Smart Search memories; whether or not all 31 memories are
filled, the search will stop after one sweep in each direction.
CONT: In this mode, the transceiver will make one pass in each direction as with One-
Shot searching; if all 31 channels are not filled after the first sweep, however, the
radio will continue sweeping until they are all filled.
Setting the Smart Search Mode
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 54: S SRCH.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired Smart Search mode
(see above).
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the setting and exit to normal operation.
Storing Smart Search Memories
1. Set the radio to the VFO mode. Be sure that you have the Squelch adjusted properly
(so that band noise is quieted).
2. Press and hold in the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key for one second, and rotate the
DIAL knob while holding in the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key
to that “S SRCH” indication appears on the display: this acti-
vates the Smart Search feature.
3. Press and hold in the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key for one second to begin the Smart
Search scanning.
4. As active channels are detected, you will observe the number of “loaded” channels
increasing in the regular memory channel window.
5. Depending on the mode you set for Smart Search operation
(“SINGLE” or “CONT”), the Smart Search scan will eventually
terminate, and the LCD will revert to Smart Search Memory Chan-
nel “C.”
6. To recall the Smart Search memories, rotate the DIAL knob to choose from among the
SMART SEARCH OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 57
frequencies stored by Smart Search.
6. To return to normal operation, press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key.
Smart Search is a great tool when visiting a city for the first time. You don’t
need to spend hours looking up repeater frequencies from a reference guide-
book. . .just ask your VX-6R where the action is!
SMART SEARCH OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 58
The Channel Counter allows measuring of the frequency of a nearby transmitter, without
knowing that frequency in advance. The frequency can be measured by bringing the VX-
6R close to the transceiver which is transmitting.
The VX-6R performs a high-speed search within a ±5 MHz range from the frequency
displayed on the LCD. When the strongest signal in that range is identified, the VX-6R
displays the frequency of that (strongest) signal, and writes it into the special “Channel
Counter” memory.
Note: This Channel Counter is designed to provide an indication of the operating fre-
quency of the incoming signal, one that is close enough to allow the user, thereafter, to tune
precisely to the other station’s frequency. This feature is not, however, designed to provide
a precise determination of the other station’s frequency.
1. Set the radio to the VFO mode in the predicted frequency range for the transmitter to
be measured.
2. Bring the VX-6R into close proximity to the transmitter to be measured.
3. Press and hold in the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key for one second, and rotate the
DIAL knob while holding in the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key
to that “CH CNT” indication appears on the display: this acti-
vates the Channel Counter feature.
4. Release the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to begin the Channel
Counter; the frequency of the nearby station will be displayed.
When the channel counter is active, a 50 dB receiver front-end
attenuator will be engaged. Therefore, only stations in close prox-
imity may have their frequencies measured using this feature.
5. If it isn’t possible to determine the signal’s frequency, the trans-
ceiver will return to the frequency on which you were operating when you started
Channel Counter operation.
6. When you are finished, just press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key. The radio will
exit from Channel Counter operation.
CHANNEL COUNTER OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 59
Setting the Channel Counter Sweep Width
You may change the bandwidth of the Channel Counter. Available selections are ±5, ±10,
±50, and ±100 MHz (default: ±5 MHz).
Here is the procedure for setting the Channel Counter Bandwidth:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 12: CH CNT.
3. Press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired bandwidth.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save
the setting and exit to normal operation.
CHANNEL COUNTER OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 60
EPCS (ENHANCED PAGING & CODE SQUELCH)
The VX-6R includes an Enhanced CTCSS tone encoder/decoder and a dedicated micro-
processor providing paging and selective calling feature. This allows you to place a call to
a specific station (Paging), and to receive calls of your choice directed only to you (Code
Squelch).
The paging and code squelch systems use two pairs of (alternately switched) CTCSS tones
which are stored in the pager memories. Basically, your receiver remains silent until it
receives the CTCSS tone pair that matches those stored in the Receiving Pager Memory.
The squelch then opens so the caller is heard, and the paging ringer immediately sounds, if
activated. When you close the PTT switch to transmit, the CTCSS tone pair which is
stored in the Transmitting Pager Memory will be transmitted automatically.
On the paged radio, the squelch will close automatically after the incoming page ends.
Meanwhile, on the paging radio, the Enhanced Paging and Code Squelch system will be
disabled after the PTT switch is released after the paging transmission. You may re-acti-
vate the Enhanced Paging and Code Squelch system again using Set Mode Item 43: PAGER,
if desired.
Storing the CTCSS Tone Pairs for EPCS Operation
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 45: PAG.CDR
for the Receiving CTCSS Tone Pair or Set Mode Item 46:
PAG.CDT for the Transmitting CTCSS Tone Pair.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the CTCSS Tone number which
corresponds to the first tone of the CTCSS Tone Pair.
5. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key, then rotate the DIAL
knob to set the CTCSS Tone number which corresponds to the
second tone of the CTCSS Tone Pair.
6. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
Th e VX- 6 R
does not recog-
nize the order of
the 1st tone and the 2nd
tone. In other words, for
example, the VX-6R con-
siders both CTCSS pairs
“10, 35” and “35, 10” to
be identical.
Hz
67.0
69.3
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
85.4
88.5
91.5
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Hz
94.8
97.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Hz
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
159.8
162.2
165.5
167.9
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Hz
171.3
173.8
177.3
179.9
183.5
186.2
189.9
192.8
196.6
199.5
No.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Hz
203.5
206.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
229.1
233.6
241.8
250.3
254.1
No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CTCSS TONE NUMBER
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 61
Activating the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch System
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 43: PAGER.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON.”
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and activate the
Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch.
6. To disable the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch, just repeat the above procedure,
rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above.
When the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch feature is activated, the
“P ” notation will appear at the 100 MHz digit of the frequency dis-
play.
During Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch operation, you may set up the
VX-6R such that a ringing “bell” sound alerts you to the fact that a call is
coming in, as described previously. See page 30 for details.
Paging Answer Back
When you press the PTT switch to respond to a page call, the VX-6R transmits the same
CTCSS tone pair. This tone pair will open the Code Squelch of the calling station. If you
prefer, you can have the VX-6R respond to page calls automatically (“transpond”).
To enable this feature:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 44: PAG.ABK.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON.”
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
The Paging Answer Back feature constitutes a form of “remote control” op-
eration that may be restricted to certain frequencies. U.S. users should con-
firm the current status of §97.201(b) of the FCC’s rules governing the Ama-
teur service before utilizing this feature on the 144 MHz band.
EPCS (ENHANCED PAGING & CODE SQUELCH)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 62
EMERGENCY FEATURE
EMERGENCY CHANNEL OPERATION
The VX-6R includes an “Emergency” feature which may be useful if you have someone
monitoring on the same frequency as your transceiver’s UHF “Home” channel. See page
39 for details on setting the Home channel.
The “Emergency” feature is activated by pressing and holding in the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key for one second. When this is done, (A) the radio is placed on the UHF amateur band
Home channel, (B) it emits a loud “Alarm” sound (the volume is controlled by the VOL
knob), (C) it flashes the TX/BUSY indicator in white, (D) if you press the PTT switch, you
will disable the Emergency feature temporarily; you can then transmit on the UHF Home
channel, and (E) two seconds after the PTT release, the Emergency feature will resume.
To disable the “Emergency” feature, pressing and holding in the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key
for one second or turn the radio off by pressing the POWER switch.
Use this feature if you are out for a walk and want a quick way of alerting a family member
as to a dangerous situation. The alarm sound may discourage an attacker and allow you to
escape.
1) Be sure to arrange with a friend or family member to be monitoring on the
same frequency, as there will be no identification sent via the Emergency
alarm sound. And do not transmit the alarm tone except in a true emergency!
2) The “Emergency” feature may be changed to another function via Set Mode Item 26:
EMG. S; see page 95 for details.
EMERGENCY AUTOMATIC ID
(
EAI
)
FEATURE
The Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) feature can be used for searching for persons who are
incapacitated in disasters like earthquakes, especially search-and-rescue personnel who
may have become injured in a debris field. In such cases, if another searcher sends out a
unique command (CTCSS tone pair), the radio of the incapacitated party, who may not be
able to speak or even press the PTT switch, will automatically cause the injured party’s
radio to transmit, so others may perform direction-finding and effect a rescue. The callsign
of the incapacitated person will also be transmitted, to assist the rescue team.
If an emergency group is working in a dangerous area, all members should engage the EAI
feature on their transceiver, so that others can provide assistance to a fallen team member,
if necessary.
The Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature has two operating modes: (1) Interval mode
and (2) Continuous mode.
In the Interval mode, when the VX-6R receives the CTCSS tone pair which is stored in
the Receiving Pager Code Memory (configured via Set Mode Item 45: PAG.CDR) on the
frequency which is stored in Memory Channel “EAI” for more than five seconds, the radio
will automatically transmit a brief (0.5 second) beep tone every 2.5 seconds until the EAI
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 63
timer expiration at the power level stored in that memory channel; it is NOT necessary for
the incapacitated person to press the PTT switch.
In the Continuous mode, when the VX-6R receives the CTCSS tone pair which is stored
in the Receiving Pager Code Memory (configured via Set Mode Item 45: PAG.CDR) on
the frequency which is stored in Memory Channel “EAI” for more than five seconds, the
radio will automatically transmit (with maximum microphone gain) continuously, until the
EAI timer expiration, at the power level stored in that memory channel; it is NOT neces-
sary for the incapacitated person to press the PTT switch.
Furthermore, if your call sign is stored in the radio and enabling the CW identifier via Set
Mode Item 14: CW ID, the radio will transmit your callsign on the air when the EAI
feature is first engaged by the remote page, and every 10 minutes thereafter. The “callsign”
ID can be changed to any desired sequence of characters, such as a name. After sending the
callsign or name, the radio will repeatedly transmit three tones for a user-defined period of
time (between 1 and 30 minutes). The callsign or name will be transmitted every 10 min-
utes.
The Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature requires that you (1) store the CTCSS Tone
Pair into the Receiving Pager Memory (see page 60 for procedure), and (2) store the de-
sired UHF coordination frequency into Memory Channel “EAI” (see page 34 for proce-
dure).
Selecting the EAI mode and its Transmit Time
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 24: EAI.TMR.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired EAI mode (Interval
EAI “INT”or Continuous EAI “CON”) and its transmit time (1-
10, 15, 20, 30, 40, and 50 minutes).
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Activating the EAI feature
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 23: EAI.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON” (thus activating the EAI
feature).
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit from the
EMERGENCY FEATURE
EMERGENCY AUTOMATIC ID
(
EAI
)
FEATURE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 64
Set mode. When the EAI feature is activated, the “ ” icon will
appear at the bottom right on the LCD.
5. To disable the EAI feature, just repeat above procedure, rotating
the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step “4” above.
1) Do not activate the EAI feature by pressing the [F/W] key, followed by the
[8(EAI)] key. This key function is used to locate an unresponsive operator,
described in the next chapter.
2) The VX-6R will ignore the EAI feature when the (1) the squelch is open, (2) there is
an incoming the signal on the operating frequency, (3) the operating frequency is the
same as the frequency which is stored in the Memory Channel “EAI,” or (4) a VHF
frequency is stored in Memory Channel “EAI.”
To Locate an Unresponsive Operator Using the EAI feature
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
8
(
EAI
)]
key to recall Memory Channel “EAI” (of
the searched person’s radio).
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
2
(
CODE
)]
key to enable
adjustment of the Transmitting Pager Memory. Set the CTCSS
tone pair which is the same CTCSS tone pair stored in the Re-
ceiving Pager Code Memory of the missing person's radio.
A. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first tone.
B. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key.
C. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the second tone.
D. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit from setting mode.
3. Press and hold in the PTT switch for five seconds to find out the persons who are
activating the EAI feature. The lost operator’s radio will beep loudly, and its transmit-
ter will respond repetitively. You may now begin direction-finding efforts.
4. You may select the ATT (Front End Attenuator) level among “ATT 1 (10 dB),” “ATT
2 (50 dB),” and “ATT OFF” by pressing the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to reduce
the signal. The ATT is often useful in helping you locate the missing person’s radio, as
peaks in weaker signals are more easily observed).
5. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
8
(
EAI
)]
key, to exit to normal operation.
EMERGENCY AUTOMATIC ID
(
EAI
)
FEATURE
EMERGENCY FEATURE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 65
The ARTS™ feature uses DCS signaling to inform both parties when you and another
ARTS™-equipped station are within communications range. This may be particularly use-
ful during Search-and Rescue situations, where is important to stay in contact with other
members of your group.
Both stations must set up their DCS codes to the same code number, then activate their
ARTS™ feature using the command appropriate for their radio. Alert ringers may be acti-
vated, if desired.
Whenever you push the PTT, or every 25 (or 15) seconds after ARTS™ is activated, your
radio will transmit a signal which includes a (subaudible) DCS signal for about 1 second. If the
other radio is in range, the beeper will sound (if enabled) and the display will show “IN RNG”
as opposed to the out of range display “OUTRNG” in which ARTS™ operation begins.
Whether you talk or not, the polling every 15 or 25 seconds will
continue until you de-activate ARTS™. Every 10 minutes, moreover,
you can have your radio transmit your callsign via CW, so as to com-
ply with identification requirements. When ARTS™ is de-activated,
DCS will also be deactivated (if you were not using it previously in
non-ARTS™ operation).
If you move out of range for more than one minute (four pollings), your radio will sense
that no signal has been received, three beeps will sound, and the display will revert to
“OUTRNG.” If you move back into range, your radio will again beep, and the display will
change back to the “IN RNG” indication.
During ARTS™ operation, it is not possible to change the operating frequency or other
settings; you must terminate ARTS™ in order to resume normal operation. This is a safety
feature designed to prevent accidental loss of contact due to channel change, etc.
Basic ARTS

Setup and Operation
1. Set your radio and the other radio(s) to the same DCS code number, per the discussion
on page ??.
2. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
4
(
ARTS
)]
key. You will
observe the “OUTRNG” display on the LCD below the operat-
ing frequency. ARTS™ operation has now commenced.
3. Every 25 seconds, your radio will transmit a “polling” call to the other station. When
that station responds with its own ARTS™ polling signal, the
display will change to “IN RNG” to confirm that the other station’s
polling code was received in response to yours.
4. Press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to exit ARTS™ operation and resume normal func-
tioning of the transceiver.
ARTS™
(
AUTOMATIC RANGE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 66
ARTS™ constitutes a form of “remote control” operation that may be re-
stricted to certain frequencies. U.S. users should confirm the current status
of §97.201(b) of the FCC’s rules governing the Amateur service before utiliz-
ing this feature on the 144 MHz band.
ARTS™ Polling Time Options
The ARTS™ feature may be programmed to poll every 25 seconds (default value) or 15
seconds. The default value provides maximum battery conservation, because the polling
signal is sent out less frequently. To change the polling interval:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 3: AR INT.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired polling interval (15
or 25 seconds).
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
ARTS™ Alert Beep Options
The ARTS™ feature allows two kinds of alert beeps (with the additional option of turning
them off), so as to alert you to the current status of ARTS™ operation. Depending on your
location and the potential annoyance associated with frequent beeps, you may choose the
Beep mode which best suits your needs. The choices are:
INRANG: The beeps are issued only when the radio first confirms that you are within
range, but does not re-confirm with beeps thereafter.
ALWAYS: Every time a polling transmission is received from the other station, the alert
beeps will be heard.
OFF: No alert beeps will be heard; you must look at the display to confirm current
ARTS™ status.
To set the ARTS™ Beep mode, use the following procedure:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 2: AR BEP.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired ARTS™ Beep mode
(see above).
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
ARTS™ (AUTOMATIC RANGE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 67
CW Identifier Setup
The ARTS™ feature includes a CW identifier, as discussed previously. Every ten minutes
during ARTS™ operation, the radio can be instructed to send “DE (your callsign) K” if
this feature is enabled. The callsign field may contain up to 6 characters.
Here’s how to program the CW Identifier:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 14: CW ID.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Item to “ON” (to enable the CW
ID function).
5. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key momentarily to display
the previously stored callsign.
6. Press and hold in the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key for 2 seconds to
clear any previous callsign.
7. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first letter/number of your
callsign, then press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key momen-
tarily to save the first letter/number and move on to the next char-
acter.
8. Repeat the previous step, as many times as necessary, to complete your callsign. Note
that the “slant bar” (– • • – •) is among the available characters, should you be a
“portable” station.
9. If you mistake, press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to back-space the cursor, then
re-enter the correct letter/number.
10. Press and hold in the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key for 2 seconds to delete all data after
the cursor that may have been previously stored erroneously.
11. When you have entered your entire callsign, press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to
confirm the callsign, then press the PTT key to save the settings and exit to normal
operation.
You may check your work by monitoring the entered callsign. To do this,
repeat steps 1- 7 above, then press the [F/W] key.
ARTS™
(
AUTOMATIC RANGE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM
)
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 68
The VX-6R can display the radio’s inside-the-case temperature, measured by internal sen-
sors. Also, when the optional Barometric Pressure unit (SU-1) is installed, you get the
unique capability of providing readout of the current barometric pressure. This informa-
tion is then used for calculation of your current altitude.
The Barometric Pressure unit requires calibration of the “offset” parameters, so that differ-
ences in pressure can be used to calculate altitude. This procedure requires that you have a
calculated barometer, and that you know your current altitude. If you are at sea level, of
course, the latter parameter requires no research.
To display the Temperature
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 65: TEMP.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to indicate the current tem-
perature inside the transceivre’s case.
4. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to
select the preferred unit (F (°F) or C (°C)).
5. Press the PTT switch to exit to normal op-
eration.
To display the Sensor Information
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 64: SU1.SET.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the sensor mode you wish to display.
BARO: Indicates the Barometric Pressure on the frequency area
and relative changes in pressure on the S-meter area (re-
quires optional SU-1). After 10 minutes, if the baromet-
ric pressure rises, the “8” and “9” segments of the S-
meter will blink. If the pressure goes down, the “4” and
“5” segments of the S-meter will blink.
ALTI: Indicates the Altitude (requires optional SU-1).
OFF: Disables display of the sensor information.
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and display the
sensor information five seconds after releasing the PTT switch.
6. When you operate the radio, the display will
change to show the frequency information,
then resume the display of the sensor infor-
mation after five seconds.
7. To disable the display of sensor information, repeat the above procedure, rotating the
DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above.
SENSOR MODE
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE ALTITUDE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 69
Selecting and Correcting the Atmospheric Pressure Meter
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 63: SU1.BRM.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to select the preferred
units of measure (HP (hpa), MB (mbar), HG (mmHg), or IC
(inches of Mercury)).
5. Press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to enable correction of the At-
mospheric Pressure Meter.
6. Rotate the DIAL knob to adjust the VX-6R display to the reading
on your calibrated barometer.
7. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Selecting and Correcting the Altimeter
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 62: SU1.ALT.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to select the preferred
units (M, or Ft).
5. Press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to enable correction of the Al-
timeter.
6. Rotate the DIAL knob to adjust the VX-6R display to the true
altitude at your current location.
7. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
The Barometer and Altimeter will only track correctly in the short term. That is,
if you calibrate the Barometer and altitude at the beginning of a day hike, the
altitude will be correctly measured during your hike. But if the radio is not used
for several weeks, you will need to check the altitude correction again, because pressure
changes associated with changing weather may be mis-interpreted as a change in altitude.
SENSOR MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 70
INTERNET CONNECTION FEATURE
The VX-6R can be used to access a “node” (repeater or base station) which is tied into the
Vertex Standard WIRES™ (Wide-Coverage Internet Repeater Enhancement System) net-
work. Details may be found at the WIRES-II Web site: http://www.vxstd.com/en/wiresinfo-
en/. This feature may also be used to access other systems, as described below.
SRG
(
“SISTER RADIO GROUP”
)
MODE
1. Press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key momentarily to activate the Internet
Connection feature. The “ ” icon will appear in the upper right
corner of the display.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob while pressing the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to select the access number
(DTMF “0” ~ “9,” “A,” “B,” “C,” “D,” “E (),” “F (#),”) corresponding to the
WIRES™ node to which you wish to establish an Internet link (ask the node or re-
peater owner/operator if you don’t know the access number in
the network). Now press the PTT switch to exit from the selec-
tion mode.
3. With the Internet Connection feature activated (as in step 1 above), the VX-6R will
generate a brief (0.1 second) DTMF tone according to your selection in step 2. This
DTMF tone is sent at the beginning of every transmission to establish or maintain the
link to the local WIRES™ node operating in the SRG mode.
4. To disable the Internet Connection feature, press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key momen-
tarily (the “ ” icon will disappear from the display).
If other users report that you always have a DTMF “beep” at the beginning
of each transmission, and you are not operating in conjunction with Internet
access, disable this function via step (4) above.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 71
FRG
(
“FRIENDLY RADIO GROUP”
)
MODE
You may access other Internet Link Systems (including WIRES™ in the “FRG” mode)
that use a DTMF string for access.
Programming the FRG code
1. Load the DTMF tones which you wish to use for Internet-link access into a Internet
Memory register. For purposes of this example, we will use “#(F)1101D” as the access
code (the “#” key is denoted by the letter “F”).
2 Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set
mode.
3 Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 32: INT.SET.
4 Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enable adjustment of this Set Mode
Item.
5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Internet Memory register
(F 0 ~ F63) into which you wish to store the access code.
6. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key momentarily. The first
digit will blink.
7. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “F” (representing DTMF “#”:
the first digit of the DTMF string).
8. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key momentarily to accept
the first digit and move to the second digit of the DTMF string.
9. Repeat the previous steps until you have completed the access code (“#(F)1101D”).
10. If you attach an alpha/numeric name “Tag” to the Internet Memory, proceed to the
next step; otherwise press and hold in the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key for one second to save the
setting.
11. Press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key momentarily to enable program-
ming of the name tag.
12. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired label.
13. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to move to the next character.
14. If you make a mistake, press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to
back-space the cursor, then re-enter the correct letter, number, or
symbol.
15. Repeat steps 12 through 14 to program the remaining letters,
numbers, or symbols of the desired label. A total of six characters may be used in the
creation of a label.
16. When you have programmed a label which is under 6 characters, press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to confirm the label.
17. Repeat steps 1 through 16 to store other access codes, if so desired.
18. Press the PTT switch to save the setting and exit to normal operation.
INTERNET CONNECTION FEATURE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 72
Operation (Accessing an FRG Node)
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 30: INT MD.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enable adjustment of this Set Mode
Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “FRG” (thus
activating the “Other Internet Link System” mode).
5. Press the PTT switch to save the new settings.
6. Press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key momentarily to activate the Internet
Connection feature. The “ ” icon will appear in the upper right
corner of the display.
7. Rotate the DIAL knob while pressing the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to select the Internet Memory
register number (F 0 ~ F63) corresponding to the Internet link
repeater to which you wish to establish an Internet link, then
press the PTT switch momentarily to lock in the selected access
number.
8. Once the Internet Connection feature is activated per step 7 above, you may now press
the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key, while you are transmitting, to send out the
selected DTMF string (to establish the link to the desired Internet-
link mode).
9. To return to the WIRES™ mode, repeat steps 1 - 5 above, selecting “SRG” in step 4.
INTERNET CONNECTION FEATURE
FRG
(
“FRIENDLY RADIO GROUP”
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 73
DTMF OPERATION
The VX-6R’s 16-button keypad allows easy DTMF dialing for Autopatch, repeater con-
trol, or Internet-link access purposes. Besides numerical digits
[
0
]
through
[
9
]
, the keypad
includes the
[

]
and
[
#
]
digits, plus the
[
A
]
,
[
B
]
,
[
C
]
, and
[
D
]
tones often used for repeater
control.
Manual DTMF Tone Generation
You can generate DTMF tones during transmission manually.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the the
[
3
(
DTMF
)]
key, then rotate the DIAL knob to
select “MANUAL.”
2. Press the
[
3
(
DTMF
)]
key to save the new setting and exit to
normal operation.
3. Press the PTT switch to begin transmission.
4. While transmitting, press the desired numbers on the keypad.
5. When you have sent all the digits desired, release the PTT switch.
DTMF Autodialer
Nine DTMF Autodial memories are provided, allowing you to store telephone numbers for
autopatch use. You can also store short autopatch or Internet-link access code streams so as
to avoid having to send them manually.
Here is the DTMF Autodial storage procedure:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 22: DT SET.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the DTMF Memory register into which you wish to
store this DTMF string.
5. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key momentarily to begin
DTMF Memory entry into the selected register.
6. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the DTMF string.
Selectable entries are 0 - 9, and A - F, with E and F representing
DTMF “” and “#” tones respectively.
7. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to accept the first digit and move to the next
digit of the DTMF string.
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have completed the telephone
number.
9. If you make a mistake, press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to
move back to the previous digit, then re-select the correct number.
10. Press and hold in the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key for 2 seconds to delete all data after
the cursor that may have been previously stored erroneously.
11. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to save the setting.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 74
12. If you store other numbers, repeat steps 3- 11 above, using a different DTMF memory
register.
13. When all required DTMF memories are filled to your satisfaction, press the PTT
switch to save the settings and exit to normal operation
You may check your work by monitoring the entered DTMF string. To do
this, repeat steps 1- 4 above, then press the [F/W] key.
To send the telephone number:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the the
[
3
(
DTMF
)]
key, then rotate the DIAL knob to
select “AUTO.”
2. Press the
[
3
(
DTMF
)]
key to save the new setting and exit to
normal operation.
3. While the DTMF Autodialer is activated, first press the PTT switch, then press the
numerical key
([
1
]
through
[
9
])
corresponding to the DTMF memory string you wish
to send. Once the string begins, you may release the PTT switch, as the transmitter will
be held “on the air” until the DTMF string is completed.
4. To disable the DTMF Autodialer, press the
[
F/W
]
key, followed by the the
[
3
(
DTMF
)]
key, then rotate the DIAL knob to select “MANUAL.”
DTMF OPERATION
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 75
The VX-6R provides a CW Training feature, which sends random Morse Code via the
sidetone (heard in the speaker), so you can inprove your CW proficiency.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 15: CWTRNG.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to select the Trainig mode (displayed in fine
print at the upper edge of the LCD):
A: Sends five Alphabet charactors only
A_r: Sends Alphabet charactors only (Repeatedly)
n: Sends five Numeric charactors only
n_r: Sends Numeric charactors only (Repeatedly)
An: Sends five Alphabet, Numeric, “?,” and “/” charactors
(Mixed)
Anr: Send Alphabet, Numeric, “?,” and “/” charactors (Mixed, Continuously in group
of five)
5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Morse speed. You may select the units of the code
speed between “WPM (Words per minute)” and “CPM: characters per minute)” by
pressing the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key.
6. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to switch the flashing of the LED (white) on
and off; a “dot” by the CW speed indicates that the LED is on.
7. Press the
[
F/W
]
key to bigin generation of the code characters (CW sidetone only, the
radio does not transmit); the transmitted characters will appear on the display. If one of
the “r” modes is not selected in step 4 above, press the
[
F/W
]
key to send another code
group.
8. To disable the CW Training feature, press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily.
9. Press the PTT switch to exit to normal operation.
The “CPM” selection is based on the international “PARIS” standard, which
stipulates five characters per word.
CW TRAINING FEATURE
Trainig mode Morse Speed
TX/BUSY Indicator Status
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 76
PASSWORD
The VX-6R provides a password feature which can minimize the chance that your trans-
ceiver could be used by an unauthorized party.
When the password feature is activated, the radio will ask for the four digit password to be
entered when the radio is first turned on. You must enter the four digit
password from the keypad. If the wrong password is entered, the
microprocessor will shut down the radio automatically.
To enter the password and activating this feature, use the following procedure:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 47: PSWD.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key momentarily to display
any previously-stored password.
6. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired num-
ber/letter (0-9, A, B, C, D, E (substitute for “”), and F (substi-
tute for “#”).
7. Press the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
key to move to the next digit.
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program the remaining numbers/letters
of the desired password.
9. If you make a mistake, press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to
move back to the previous digit, then re-select the correct num-
ber/letter.
10. When you have finished entering the password, press the PTT
switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
11. If you wish to disable the Password feature, repeat steps 1 - 4 above, rotating the DIAL
knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above, then press the PTT switch.
1) We recommend that you to write down the password number, and keep it in
a safe place you can easily find if you forget your password.
2) If you forget the password number, you may turn on the transceiver by
performing the “Microprocessor Resetting” procedure (see page 85). However, the VX-
6R will clear the password, as well as all memories, and will restore all other settings to
factory defaults.
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 77
PROGRAMMING THE “P” KEY
The VX-6R can assigne, using the Set Mode, a user-selected Menu Item to the “primary”
function of the
[
P
(
DMR
)]
key.
To assign a preferred Set Mode Item to the
[
P
(
DMR
)]
key:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Set Mode Item which you wish to assign to the key
as a Menu short-cut.
3. Press and hold in the
[
P
(
DMR
)]
key for one second to assign the Set Mode Item to the
[
P
(
DMR
)]
key.
4. Now you can recall this preferred Set Mode Item by simply pressing the
[
P
(
DMR
)]
key momentarily.
RECEIVE BATTERY SAVER SETUP
An important feature of the VX-6R is its Receive Battery Saver, which “puts the radio to
sleep” for a time interval, periodically “waking it up” to check for activity. If somebody is
talking on the channel, the VX-6R will remain in the “active” mode, then resume its “sleep”
cycles. This feature significantly reduces quiescent battery drain, and you may change the
amount of “sleep” time between activity checks using the Set Mode:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 53: RXSAVE.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired “sleep” duration. The
available selections are 200 ms, 300 ms, 500 ms, 1 second, 2
seconds, or OFF. The default value is 200 ms.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to save the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
When you are operating on Packet, switch the Receive Battery Saver OFF, as
the sleep cycle may “collide” with the beginning of an incoming Packet trans-
mission, causing your TNC not to receive the full data burst.
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 78
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
WAKEUP FEATURE SETUP
The Wakeup feature is similarly to the Receive Battery Saver. However, it is a newer, more
advanced feature which conserves battery life by providing a longer “sleep” time than the
regular Receive battery Saver. The Wakeup feature, once engaged, operates while the trans-
ceiver is turned off (“WAKEUP” will appear on the LCD).
To set up the Wakeup feature:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 72: WAKEUP.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired “sleep” duration.
5SEC/10SEC/20SEC/30SEC:
Based on the selected time value, the radio will periodically check
the operating frequency which it was on when the radio was turned off for activity. If a
signal is received on the frequency which is strong enough to open the Squelch, the
radio will turn itself on fully. If the EAI feature is activated when the radio was turned
off, the radio also checks on the EAI frequency (Memory Channel “EAI”) for activity.
EAI:
Checks the EAI frequency (Memory Channel “EAI”) every 5 seconds. If a properly-
coded signal is received on the EAI frequency, the radio will turn itself on and then
automatically transmit in accordance with the setting of Set Mode Item 18: EAI.
OFF:
Disables the Wakeup feature.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to save the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
6. If you wish to disable the Wakeup feature, just repeat the above procedure, rotating the
DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above.
When the radio is turned off, the Wakeup feature will be engaged,
and the “WAKEUP”notition will be been on the display.
You may observe a low-level “pop” noise while the Wakeup feature
is polling; you may disable this popping by pressing the
[
MODE
(
SP
S
)
SQ TYP
]
key in step 4 above (the “SAVE” notation will disap-
pear). However, the battery life will be reduced somewhat.
You may cancel the Wakeup feature temporarily by pressing the PWR switch while the
Wakeup feature is engaged.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 79
TX BATTERY SAVER
The VX-6R also includes a useful Transmit Battery Saver, which will automatically lower
the power output level when the last signal received was very strong. For example, when
you are in the immediate vicinity of a repeater station, there generally is no reason to use
the High Power output selection in order to achieve full-quieting access to the repeater.
With the Transmit Battery Saver, the automatic selection of Low Power operation con-
serves battery drain significantly.
To activate the Transmit Battery Saver:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 70: TXSAVE.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON” (thus
activating the Transmit Battery Saver).
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
ATT
(
FRONT END ATTENUATOR
)
The attenuator will reduce all signals (and noise) by 10 dB, and it may be used to make
reception more pleasant under extremely crowded conditions.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 5: ATT.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON” (thus
activating the attenuator).
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
6. If you wish to disable the attenuator, just repeat the above procedure, rotating the
DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step “4” above.
When the attenuator is activated, the Operating Mode icon (AM, FM, or WFM)
will blink on the display.
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 80
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
DISABLING THE TX/BUSY INDICATOR
Further battery conservation may be accomplished by disabling the BUSY indicator which
appears while the VX-6R is receiving a signal. Use the following procedure:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 11: BSY.LED.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “OFF” (thus
disabling the BUSY indicator).
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
6. If you wish to re-enable the BUSY Indicator, just repeat the above procedure, rotating
the DIAL knob to select “ON” in step 4 above.
AUTOMATIC POWER-OFF
(
APO
)
FEATURE
The APO feature helps conserve battery life by automatically turning the radio off after a
user-defined period of time within which there has been no dial or key activity. The avail-
able selections for the time before power-off are 0.5/1/3/5/8 hours, as well as APO Off.
The default condition for the APO is OFF, and here is the procedure for activating it:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 1: APO.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired time period after which
the radio will automatically shut down.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
When the APO is activated, the “ ” icon will appear at the upper
right corner on the LCD. If there is no action by you within the time
interval programmed, the microprocessor will shut down the radio
automatically.
Press and hold in the PWR switch for one second, to turn the radio back on after an APO
shutdown, as usual.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 81
AUTOMATIC POWER-ON FEATURE
The VX-6R also includes the capability to turn itself on after a programmed time interval.
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 41: ON TMR.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the desired time priod after which
the radio will automatically turn on.
Note that this is not the time of day when the radio will turn on;
it is the numbaer of hours and minutes until the radio turns on.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to save the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
When the radio is turned off, this activates the Automatic Power-On
feature; a count-down timer in the display will show the time remain-
ing until automatic switch-on.
You may cancel the Automatic Power-On feature (to turn off the radio) by pressing and
holding the PWR switch for one second while the Automatic Power-On feature is en-
gaged.
The Automatic Power-On feature will be ignored when the Wakeup feature is
activated.
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 82
BUSY CHANNEL LOCK-OUT
(
BCLO
)
The BCLO feature prevents the radio’s transmitter from being activated if a signal strong
enough to break through the “noise” squelch is present. On a frequency where stations
using different CTCSS or DCS codes may be active, BCLO prevents you from disrupting
their communications accidentally (because your radio may be muted by its own Tone
Decoder). The default setting for the BCLO is OFF, and here is how to change that setting:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 6: BCLO.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON” (thus
activating the BCLO feature).
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Remember that BCLO is controlled by the Noise Squelch; if you have DCS or
TSQ engaged, BCLO will inhibit transmission if a station is on frequency but
not transmitting the proper tone; BCLO will thus prevent you from interfer-
ing with the other station's transmission.
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 83
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
TRANSMITTER TIME-OUT TIMER
(
TOT
)
The TOT feature provides a safety switch which limits transmission time to a pre-pro-
grammed value. This will promote battery conservation by not allowing you to make ex-
cessively-long transmissions, and in the event of a stuck PTT switch (perhaps if the radio
or a Speaker/Mic is wedged between car seats) it can prevent interference to other users as
well as battery depletion. As configured at the factory the TOT feature is set to 3 minutes,
and here is the procedure for activating it:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 67: TOT.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the Time-Out Timer to the desired
“Maximum TX” time (2.5/5/10 minutes), or OFF.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
1) When your transmission time is within 10 seconds of the Time-Out Timer
expiration, an Alert bell will provide an audible warning from the speaker.
2) Since brief transmissions are the mark of a good operator, try setting up
your radio’s TOT feature for a maximum transmission time of one minute. This will
significantly improve battery life, too!
CHANGING THE TX DEVIATION LEVEL
In many areas of the world, channel congestion has required that operating channels be
closely spaced. In such operating environments, it often is required that operators use
reduced deviation levels, so as to reduce the potential for interference to users on adjacent
channels. The VX-6R includes a simple method of accomplishing this:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 27: HLF.DEV.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of this
Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON.” In this
configuration (HALF DEVIATION active), the transmitter’s de-
viation will be approximately ±2.5 kHz, and the received audio
output level will be increased, for easier listening on the narrow signal.
5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT switch to save the new setting and
exit to normal operation.
The “normal” setting for the deviation (when this Set Mode Item is set to
“OFF”) is ±5 kHz.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 84
MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS
NOTE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 85
RESET PROCEDURES
In the event of erratic operation of the transceiver, it is possible that data on the micropro-
cessor may have become corrupted. While this is a highly unusual situation, the only path
to recovery may involve resetting of the microprocessor. Here’s how to do this:
MICROPROCESSOR RESETTING
To clear all memories and all other settings to factory defaults:
1. Turn the radio off.
2. Press and hold in the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
,
[
0
(
SET
)]
, and
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
keys
while turning the radio on.
3. Press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to reset all settings to their factory defaults (press
any other key to cancel the Reset procedure).
SET MODE RESETTING
To reset the Set Mode Item settings to their factory defaults:
1. Turn the radio off.
2. Press and hold in the
[
MODE
(
SP S
)
SQ TYP
]
and
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
keys while turn-
ing the radio on.
3. Press the
[
F/W
]
key momentarily to reset the Set (Menu) mode settings to their factory
defaults (press any other key to cancel the Reset procedure).
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 86
The VX-6R includes a convenient “Clone” feature, which allows the memory and configu-
ration data from one transceiver to be transferred to another VX-6R. This can be particu-
larly useful when configuring a number of transceivers for a public service operation. Here
is the procedure for Cloning one radio’s data to another:
1. Turn both radios off.
2. Connect the user-constructed cloning cable and two optional CT-91 Microphone Adapt-
ers (one on each end) between the MIC/SP jacks of the two radios.
3. Press and hold in the
[
F/W
]
key while turning the radios on. Do
this for both radios (the order of switch-on does not matter). The
“CLONE” notation will appear on the displays of both radios.
4. On the Destination radio, press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key
(“- - WAIT- - ” will appear on the LCD).
5. Press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key on the Source radio;
“- - - - TX- - - - ” will appear on the Source radio, and the data from
this radio will be transferred to the other radio.
6. If there is a problem during the cloning process, “ERROR” will
be displayed. Check your cable connections and battery voltage,
and try again.
7. If the data transfer is successful, “CLONE” will reappear on the
Source radio and the Destination radio will return to the normal operation. Turn both
radios off and disconnect the cloning cable. You can then turn the Source radio back
on, and begin normal operation.
CLONING
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 87
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
The VX-6R Set Mode, already described in parts of many previous chapters, is easy to
activate and set. It may be used for configuration of a wide variety of transceiver param-
eters, some of which have not been detailed previously. Use the following procedure to
activate the Set Mode:
1. Press the
[
F/W
]
key, then press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key to enter the Set mode.
2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Set Mode Item to be ad-
justed.
3. Press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momentarily to enable adjustment of
the Set Mode Item.
4. Rotate the DIAL knob to adjust or select the parameter to be
changed on the Set Mode Item selected in above step.
5. After completing your selection and adjustment, press the PTT switch momentarily to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Some Set Mode Items (like Set Mode Item 50: TN FRQ) require that the
[
0(SET)
]
key be pressed after setting of the parameter, and before exiting to
normal operation.
“MY MENU” Short-cut Key Setup
In the factory default, the primary (press key) function of the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key is set to
activating the Internet Connection feature. However, you may change the primary (press
key) function of the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key to a short-cut path for recall of one of Set Mode
Items.
1. Press and hold in the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key while turning the radio on. This procedure
switches the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key between the “Internet Connection” function and the
“MY MENU” key function.
2. Recall the Set Mode Item which you wish to assign to the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key as a
Menu short-cut.
3. Press and hold in the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key for one second to assign the Set Mode Item
to the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key. “MY KEY” will appear on the display, to confirm that the
command was executed.
4. Now, a momentary press of the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key will immediately recall the se-
lected Menu item. You must press the
[ (
LK
)
TXPO
]
key again to exit to normal
operation.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 88
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
SET MODE ITEM
1 [APO]
2 [AR BEP]
3 [AR INT]
4 [ARS]
5 [ATT]
6 [BCLO]
7 [BEEP]
8 [BELL]
9 [BP LVL]
10 [BNK NM]
11 [BSY.LED]
12 [CH CNT]
13 [CLK.SFT]
14 [CW ID]
15 [CWTRNG]
16 [DC VLT]
17 [DCS CD]
18 [DCS RV]
19 [DIMMER]
20 [DMR.WRT]
21 [DT A/M]
22 [DT SET]
23 [EAI]
24 [EAI.TMR]
25 [EDG.BEP]
26 [EMG S]
27 [HLF.DEV]
28 [HM/RV]
29 [INT CD]
30 [INT MD]
31 [INT.A/M]
32 [INT.SET]
33 [LAMP]
34 [LED LT]
35 [LOCK]
36 [M/T-CL]
37 [MCGAIN]
38 [MW MD]
39 [NAME]
40 [NM SET]
FUNCTION
Setting of the Automatic Power-Off feature.
Selects the Beep option during ARTS operation.
Selects the Polling Interval during ARTS operation.
Enables/Disables the Automatic Repeater Shift function.
Enables/Disables the Receiver Front-end (10 dB) Attenuator.
Enables/Disables the Busy Channel Lock-Out feature.
Enables/Disables the keypad beeper.
Selects the number of CTCSS/DCS Bell ringer repetitions.
Adjust the Beep volume level.
Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory Group.
Enables/Disables the BUSY LED while the Squelch is open.
Selects the Channel Counter Search Width.
Shifting of the CPU clock frequency.
Programs and activates the CW Identifier (used during ARTS op-
eration).
Enables/Disables the CW Training feature and selects the sending
speed of the Morse Code.
Indicates the DC Supply Voltage.
Setting of the DCS code.
Enables/Disables “Inverted” DCS code decoding.
Setting of the Display brightness level.
Enables/Disables over-written the Direct Memory Recall Channel
while operating on the Direct Memory Recall Channel.
Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodial feature.
Programming of the DTMF Autodialer.
Enables/Disables the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature.
Setting of the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) operating mode and
its Transmit Time.
Enables/Disables the Band-edge beeper while selecting the fre-
quency via the DIAL knob.
Selects the alarm(s) utilized when the Emergency function is en-
gaged.
Reducing the Deviation level by 50 %.
Selects the Primary function of the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key.
Selects the Access Number (DTMF digit) for WIRES
TM
operation.
Selects the Internet Link Connection mode.
Enables/Disables DTMF Autodialer feature while operating on the
Internet Connection feature.
Selects the memory register for an Access Number (DTMF code)
for non-WIRES™ Internet Link System access.
Selects the LCD/Keypad Lamp mode.
Illuminates the STROBE glows continuously in white.
Selects the Control Locking lockout combination.
Selects the MONI switch (just below the PTT switch) function.
Adjust the microphone gain level.
Selects the method of selection of channels for Memory Storage.
Toggles the display indication between “frequency” and the
channel’s “Alpha/Numeric Tag.”
Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory channels.
AVAILABLE VALUES
(DEFAULT: BOLD ITARIC)
OFF / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 3HOUR /
5HOUR / 8HOUR
IN RNG / ALWAYS / OFF
25 SEC / 15 SEC
ON / OFF
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
ON / OFF
OFF / 1 / 3 / 5 / 8 /
CONT (Continuous ringing)
LVL 1 - LVL 9 (LVL 5)
---
ON / OFF
±5 MHz / ±10 MHz /
±50 MHz / ±100 MHz
OFF / ON
---
OFF /
4WPM-13WPM / 15WPM /
17WPM / 20WPM / 24WPM /
30WPM / 40WPM
(20CPM-65CPM (5CPM multiples) /
75CPM / 85CPM / 100CPM /
120CPM / 150CPM / 200CPM)
---
104 standard DCS codes (023)
DISABLE / ENABLE
LVL 0 - LVL 12 (LVL 7)
MANUAL / AUTO
OFF / ON
---
OFF / ON
INT. 1M through INT.10M /
INT.15M / INT.20M / INT.30M /
INT.40M / INT. 50M
CON. 1M through CON.10M /
CON.15M / CON.20M / CON.30M /
CON.40M / CON. 50M (CON.5M)
OFF / ON
BP+STR / BEAM / BP+BEM / CW /
BP+CW / BEEP / STROBE
OFF / ON
REV / HOME
DTMF 1 - DTMF F
SRG / FRG
MANUAL / AUTO
---
KEY / CONT / OFF
---
KEY / DIAL / K+D / PTT /
P+K / P+D / ALL
MONI / T-CALL
1
LVL 1 - LVL 9 (LVL 5)
NEXT / LOWER
FREQ / ALPHA
--
1: Depends on the transceiver version.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 89
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
SET MODE ITEM
41 [ON TMR]
42 [OPN.MSG]
43 [PAGER]
44 [PAG.ABK]
45 [PAG.CDR]
46 [PAG.CDT]
47 [PSWD]
48 [PTT.DLY]
49 [RESUME]
50 [RF SQL]
51 [RPT]
52 [RX MD]
53 [RXSAVE]
54 [S SRCH]
55 [SCN.LMP]
56 [SHIFT]
57 [SKIP]
58 [SPLIT]
59 [SQL]
60 [SQL.TYP]
61 [STEP]
62 [SU1.ALT]
63 [SU1.BRM]
64 [SU1.SET]
65 [TEMP]
66 [TN FRQ]
67 [TOT]
68 [TS MUT]
69 [TS SPD]
70 [TXSAVE]
71 [VFO MD]
72 [WAKEUP]
73 [WX ALT]
FUNCTION
Set the ON Timer time.
Selects the Opening Message that appears when the radio is pow-
ered on.
Enables/disables the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch
function.
Enables/disables the Answer Back function of the Enhanced CTCSS
Paging & Code Squelch.
Setting the Receiver Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging
& Code Squelch.
Setting the Transmitting Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Pag-
ing & Code Squelch.
Programs and activates the Password feature.
Select the time delay between when the PTT switch is pressed
and the carrier is transmitted.
Selects the Scan Resume mode.
Adjusts the RF Squelch threshold level.
Sets the Repeater Shift Direction.
Selects the receiving mode.
Selects the Receive-mode Battery Saver interval (“sleep” ratio)
Selects the Smart Search Sweep mode.
Enables/Disables the Scan lamp while paused.
Sets the magnitude of the repeater Shift.
Selects the Memory Scan “Skip” channel-selection mode.
Enables/Disables split CTCSS/DCS coding.
Sets the Squelch threshold level.
Selects the Tone Encoder and/or Decoder mode.
Setting of the synthesizer steps.
Selects the measurement units for the altimeter, and correcting the
altimeter.
Selects the measurement units for the Barometric Pressure, and
correcting the Barometric Pressure.
Selects the display of the sensor units’ information.
Indicates indicate the current temperature inside the transceivre’s
case and selects the measurement units (“°F” or “°C”) for the tem-
perature sensor.
Setting of the CTCSS Tone Frequency.
Setting of the TOT time.
Enables/Disables the receiver audio output during the Tone Serch
Scanner is activated.
Selects the Tone Serch Scanner speed.
Enables/Disables the Transmitter Battery Saver.
Enables or disables the VFO band edge limiting for the current
band.
Setting of the Wakeup feature.
Enables/Disables the Weather Alert Scan feature.
AVAILABLE VALUES
(DEFAULT: BOLD ITARIC)
OFF /
00H10M (00:10) - 24H00M (24:00)
(10 minutes multiples)
DC / MSG / OFF
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
(05
_
47)
(05
_
47)
--
OFF / 20MS / 50MS /
100MS / 200MS
3 SEC / 5 SEC / 10 SEC /
BUSY / HOLD
OFF / S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / S5 /
S6 / S7 / S8 / S9 / S9+
SIMP / –RPT / +RPT
AUTO / N-FM / AM / W-FM
200 MS / 300 MS / 500 MS /
1 S / 2 S / OFF
SINGLE / CONT
ON / OFF
0.00 - 149.95 MHz
2
(50 kHz increments)
OFF / SKIP / ONLY
OFF / ON
LVL 0 - LVL 15 (Narrow FM: LVL 1),
LVL 0 - LVL 8 (Wide FM: LVL 2)
OFF / TONE / T SQL /
DCS / RV TN
5.0k / 10.0k / 12.5k / 15.0k / 20.0k /
25.0k / 50.0k / 100.0k / AUTO
M / Ft
1, 3
Offset: –1000 - 0 - +1000
HP / MB / HG / IC
1, 3
Offset: –1000 - 0 - +1000
OFF / BARO / ALTI
3
--
50 standard CTCSS tones (100 Hz)
OFF / 1MIN / 3MIN / 5MIN / 10MIN
ON / OFF
FAST / LOW
OFF / ON
BAND / ALL
OFF / 5S / 10S / 20S / 30S / EAI
OFF / ON
1: Depends on the transceiver version.
2: Depends on the frequency band.
3: Requires optional SU-1.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 90
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
SET MODE ITEM
4 [ARS]
51 [RPT]
56 [SHIFT]
SET MODE ITEM
8 [BELL]
17 [DCS CD]
18 [DCS RV]
21 [DT A/M]
22 [DT SET]
59 [SQL]
60 [SQL.TYP]
66 [TN FRQ]
SET MODE ITEM
2 [AR BEP]
3 [AR INT]
14 [CW ID]
SET MODE ITEM
10 [BNK NM]
20 [DMR.WRT]
38 [MW MD]
39 [NAME]
40 [NM SET]
SET MODE ITEM
49 [RESUME]
55 [SCN.LMP]
57 [SKIP]
73 [WX ALT]
68 [TS MUT]
69 [TS SPD]
SET MODE ITEM
53 [RXSAVE]
70 [TXSAVE]
72 [WAKEUP]
SET MODE ITEM
29 [INT CD]
30 [INT MD]
31 [INT.A/M]
32 [INT.SET]
SET MODE ITEM
23 [EAI]
24 [EAI.TMR]
26 [EMG S]
SET MODE ITEM
43 [PAGER]
44 [PAG.ABK]
45 [PAG.CDR]
46 [PAG.CDT]
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
ON / OFF
SIMP / –RPT / +RPT
0.00 - 149.95 MHz
1
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
OFF / 1 / 3 / 5 / 8 /
CONT (Continuous ringing)
104 standard DCS codes (023)
DISABLE / ENABLE
OFF / ON
---
LVL 0 - LVL 15 (NFM: LVL 1),
LVL 0 - LVL 8 (WFM: LVL 2)
OFF / TONE / T SQL /
DCS / RV TN
50 standard CTCSS tones (100 Hz)
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
IN RNG / ALWAYS / OFF
25 SEC / 15 SEC
--
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
--
MANUAL / AUTO
NEXT / LOWER
FREQ / ALPHA
--
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
BUSY / HOLD / TIME
ON / OFF
OFF / SKIP / ONLY
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
FAST / SLOW
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
200 MS / 300 MS / 500 MS /
1 S / 2 S / OFF
OFF / ON
OFF / 5S / 10S / 20S / 30S / EAI
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
DTMF 1 - DTMF F
SRG / FRG
MANUAL / AUTO
--
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
OFF / ON
INT. 1M through INT.10M,
INT.15M, INT.20M, INT.30M,
INT.40M, INT. 50M,
CON. 1M through CON.10M,
CON.15M, CON.20M, CON.30M,
CON.40M, and CON. 50M
(CON.15M)
BP+STR / BEAM / BP+BEM / CW /
BP+CW / BEEP / STROBE
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
(05
_
47)
(05
_
47)
REPEATER SETTING
Enables/Disables the Automatic Repeater Shift function.
Sets the Repeater Shift Direction.
Sets the magnitude of the repeater Shift.
CTCSS/DCS SETTING
Selects the number of CTCSS/DCS Bell ringer repetitions.
Setting of the DCS code.
Enables/Disables "Inverted" DCS code decoding.
Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodial feature.
Programming of the DTMF Autodialer.
Sets the Squelch threshold level.
Selects the Tone Encoder and/or Decoder mode.
Setting of the CTCSS Tone Frequency.
ARTS SETTING
Selects the Beep option during ARTS operation.
Selects the Polling Interval during ARTS operation.
Programs and activates the CW Identifier.
MEMORY SETTING
Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory Group.
Enables/Disables over-written the Direct Memory Recall Channel while operating on the Direct
Memory Recall Channel.
Selects the method of selection of channels for Memory Storage.
Toggles the display indication between “Frequency” and the channel's "Alpha/Numeric Tag."
Stores Alpha-Numeric "Tags" for the Memory channels.
SCAN SETTING
Selects the Scan Resume mode.
Enables/Disables the Scan lamp while paused.
Selects the Memory Scan “Skip•Echannel-selection mode.
Enables/Disables the Weather Alert Scan feature.
Enables/Disables the receiver audio output during the Tone Serch Scanner is activated.
Selects the Tone Serch Scanner speed.
POWER SAVING SETTING
Selects the Receive-mode Battery Saver interval.
Enables/Disables the Transmitter Battery Saver.
Setting of the Wakeup feature.
WIRES
TM
SETTING
Selects the Access Number (DTMF digit) for WIRES
TM
operation.
Selects the Internet Link Connection mode.
Selects the memory register for an Access Number (DTMF code) for non-WIRES
TM
Internet
Link System access.
Enables/Disables DTMF Autodialer feature while operating on the Internet Connection feature.
EAI SETTING
Enables/Disables the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature.
Setting of the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) operating mode and its Transmit Time.
Selects the alarm(s) utilized when the Emergency function is engaged.
EPCS SETTING
Enables/disables the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch function.
Enables/disables the Answer Back function of the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch.
Setting the Receiver Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch.
Setting the Transmitting Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch.
1: Depends on the frequency band.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 91
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
SET MODE ITEM
7 [BEEP]
9 [BP LVL]
11 [BSY.LED]
28 [HM/RV]
33 [LAMP]
35 [LOCK]
36 [M/T-CL]
SET MODE ITEM
62 [SU1.ALT]
63 [SU1.BRM]
64 [SU1.SET]
SET MODE ITEM
16 [DC VLT]
19 [DIMMER]
65 [TEMP]
SET MODE ITEM
1 [APO]
5 [ATT]
6 [BCLO]
12 [CH CNT]
13 [CLK.SFT]
15 [CWTRNG]
25 [EDG.BEP]
27 [HLF.DEV]
34 [LED LT]
37 [MCGAIN]
41 [ON TMR]
42 [OPN.MSG]
47 [PSWD]
48 [PTT.DLY]
50 [RF SQL]
52 [RX MD]
54 [S SRCH]
58 [SPLIT]
61 [STEP]
67 [TOT]
71 [VFO MD]
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
ON / OFF
LVL 1 - LVL 9 (LVL 5)
ON / OFF
REV / HOME
KEY / CONT / OFF
KEY / DIAL / K+D / PTT /
P+K / P+D / ALL
MONI / T-CALL
2
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
M / Ft
2, 3
Offset: –1000 - 0 - +1000
HP / MB / HG / IC
2, 3
Offset: –1000 - 0 - +1000
OFF / BARO / ALTI
3
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
--
LVL 0 - LVL 12 (LVL 7)
--
AVAILABLE VALUES
(
DEFAULT
)
OFF / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 3HOUR /
5HOUR / 8HOUR
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
±5 MHz / ±10 MHz / ±50 MHz /
±100 MHz
OFF / ON
OFF / 4WPM-13WPM / 15WPM /
17WPM / 20WPM / 24WPM /
30WPM / 40WPM
(20CPM - 65CPM (5CPM multiples)
/ 75CPM / 85CPM /100CPM /
120CPM / 150CPM / 200CPM)
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
---
LVL 1 - LVL 10 (LVL 5)
OFF /
00H10M (00:10) - 24H00M (24:00)
(10 minutes multiples)
DC / MSG / OFF
--
OFF / 20MS / 50MS / 100MS /
200MS
OFF / S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 /
S5 / S6 / S7 / S8 / S9 / S9+
AUTO / N-FM / AM / W-FM
SINGLE / CONT
OFF / ON
5.0k / 10.0k / 12.5k / 15.0k / 20.0k /
25.0k / 50.0k / 100.0k / AUTO
OFF / 1MIN / 3MIN / 5MIN / 10MIN
BAND / ALL
SWITCH/KNOB SETTING
Enables/Disables the keypad beeper.
Adjust the Beep volume level.
Enables/Disables the BUSY LED while the Squelch is open.
Selects the Primary function of the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key.
Selects the LCD/Keypad Lamp mode.
Selects the Control Locking lockout combination.
Selects the MONI switch (just below the PTT switch) function.
SU-1 SETTING
Selects the measurement units for the altimeter, and correcting the altimeter.
Selects the measurement units for the Barometric Pressure, and correcting the Barometric
Pressure.
Selects the display of the sensor units’ information.
DISPLAY SETTING
Indicates the DC Supply Voltage
Setting of the Display brightness level.
Indicates indicate the current temperature inside the transceivre’s case and selects the mea-
surement units (“°F” or “°C”) for the temperature sensor.
MISCELLANEOUS SETTING
Setting of the Automatic Power-Off feature.
Enables/Disables the Receiver Front-end (10 dB) Attenuator.
Enables/Disables the Busy Channel Lock-Out feature.
Selects the Channel Counter Search Width.
Shifting of the CPU clock frequency.
Enables/Disables the CW Training feature and selects the sending speed of the Morse Code.
Enables/Disables the Band-edge beeper while selecting the frequency via the DIAL knob.
Reducing the Deviation level by 50 %.
Illuminates the STROBE glows continuously in white.
Adjust the microphone gain level.
Set the ON Timer time.
Selects the Opening Message that appears when the radio is powered on.
Programs and activates the Password feature.
Select the time delay between when the PTT switch is pressed and the carrier is transmitted.
Adjusts the RF Squelch threshold level.
Selects the receiving mode.
Selects the Smart Search Sweep mode.
Enables/Disables split CTCSS/DCS coding.
Setting of the synthesizer steps.
Setting of the TOT time
Enables or disables the VFO band edge limiting for the current band.
1: Depends on the frequency band.
2: Depends on the transceiver version.
3: Requires optional SU-1.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 92
Set Mode Item 1
[
APO
]
Function: Setting of the Automatic Power-Off feature.
Available Values: OFF/30MIN/1HOUR/3HOUR/5HOUR/8HOUR
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 2
[
AR BEP
]
Function: Selects the Beep option during ARTS operation.
Available Values: INRANG/ALWAYS/OFF
Default: INRANG
INRANG: Beeps sound only when the radio first detects that you are within range.
ALWAYS: Beeps sound every time a polling transmission is received from the other sta-
tion (every 15 or 25 seconds when in range).
OFF: No alert beeps sound.
Set Mode Item 3
[
AR INT
]
Function: Selects the Polling Interval during ARTS operation.
Available Values: 25 SEC/15 SEC
Default: 25SEC
Set Mode Item 4
[
ARS
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Automatic Repeater Shift function.
Available Values: ARS. ON/ARS.OFF
Default: ARS. ON
Set Mode Item 5
[
ATT
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Receiver Front-end (10 dB) Attenuator.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 6
[
BCLO
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Busy Channel Lock-Out feature.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 7
[
BEEP
]
Function: Enables/Disables the keypad beeper.
Available Values: ON/OFF
Default: ON
Set Mode Item 8
[
BELL
]
Function: Selects the number of CTCSS/DCS Bell ringer repetitions.
Available Values: OFF/1/3/5/8/CONT (Continuous ringing)
Default: OFF
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 93
Set Mode Item 9
[
BP LVL
]
Function: Adjust the Beep volume level.
Available Values: LVL 1 - LVL 10
Default: LVL 5
Set Mode Item 10
[
BNK NM
]
Function: Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory Group.
See page ?? for details.
Set Mode Item 11
[
BSY.LED
]
Function: Enables/Disables the BUSY LED while the Squelch is open.
Available Values: ON/OFF
Default: ON
Set Mode Item 12
[
CH CNT
]
Function: Selects the Channel Counter Search Width.
Available Values: ±5 MHz/±10 MHz/±50 MHz/±100 MHz
Default: ±5 MHz
Set Mode Item 13
[
CLK.SFT
]
Function: Shifting of the CPU clock frequency.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
This function is only used to move a spurious response “birdie,” should it fall on a desired
frequency.
Set Mode Item 14
[
CW ID
]
Function: Programs and activates the CW Identifier (used during ARTS operation).
See page ?? for details.
Set Mode Item 15
[
CWTRNG
]
Function: Enables/Disables the CW Training feature and selects the sending speed of the
Morse Code chanacter groups.
Available Values: OFF/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/15/17/20/24/30/40 WPM or
OFF/20/25/30/35/40/45/50/55/60/65/75/85/100/120/150/200 CPM
Default: OFF
Note: To switch units between “WPM” and “CPM,” just press the
[
V/M
(
DW
)
MT
]
key.
Set Mode Item 16
[
DC VLT
]
Function: Indicates the DC Supply Voltage.
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 94
Set Mode Item 17
[
DCS CD
]
Function: Setting of the DCS code.
Available Values: 104 standard DCS codes
Default: DCS.023
Set Mode Item 18
[
DCS RV
]
Function: Enables/Disables “Inverted” DCS
code decoding.
Available Values: DISABLE/ENABLE
Default: DISABLE
Set Mode Item 19
[
DIMMER
]
Function: Setting of the Display brightness level.
Available Values: LVL 0 - LVL 12
Default: LVL 12
Set Mode Item 20
[
DMR.WRT
]
Function: Enables/Disables over-writing of the Direct Memory Recall Channels while
operating on a Direct Memory Recall Channel.
Available Values: ON/OFF
Default: ON
Set Mode Item 21
[
DT A/M
]
Function: Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodial feature.
Available Values: MANUAL/AUTO
Default: MANUAL
Set Mode Item 22
[
DT SET
]
Function: Programming of the DTMF Autodialer.
See page 73 for details.
Set Mode Item 23
[
EAI
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 24
[
EAI.TMR
]
Function: Setting of the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) operating mode and its Transmit
Time.
Available Values:
INT. 1M through INT.10M, INT.15M, INT.20M, INT.30M, INT.40M, INT. 50M,
CON. 1M through CON.10M, CON.15M, CON.20M, CON.30M, CON.40M, and CON.
50M
Default: CON. 5M
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
DCS CODE
023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 051 053
054 065 071 072 073 074 114 115 116 122
125 131 132 134 143 145 152 155 156 162
165 172 174 205 212 223 225 226 243 244
245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271
274 306 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351
356 364 365 371 411 412 413 423 431 432
445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503
506 516 523 526 532 546 565 606 612 624
627 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731
732 734 743 754 – – – – – –
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 95
Set Mode Item 25
[
EDG.BEP
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Band-edge Beeper while selecting the frequency via the
DIAL knob.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 26
[
EMG S
]
Function: Selects the alarm(s) utilized when the Emergency function is engaged.
Available Values: BP+STR/BEAM/BP+BEM/CW/BP+CW/BEEP/STROBE
Default: BP+STR
BP+STR: Loud “Alarm” sounds and the TX/BUSY indicator flashes.
BEAM: The TX/BUSY indicator glows continuously in white.
BP+BEM: Loud “Alarm” sounds and the TX/BUSY indicator glows continuously in white.
CW: Transmits the Morse Code “SOS” (• • • – – – • • •) message on the air beginning
one minute after activation of the Emergency function.
BP+CW: Loud “Alarm” sounds and the Morse Code “SOS” (• • • – – – • • •) message is
transmitted on the air beginning one minute after activation of the Emergency
function.
BEEP: Loud “Alarm” sounds.
STROBE: The TX/BUSY indicator lamp flashes.
When the radio is set to the CW or BP+CW mode, the radio will be instructed to send “DE
(your callsign)” after the sending of the SOS message, if your callsign is entered via Set
Mode Item 14: CW ID.
Set Mode Item 27
[
HLF.DEV
]
Function: Reducing the Deviation level by 50 %.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 28
[
HM/RV
]
Function: Selects the Primary function of the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key.
Available Values: REV/HOME
Default: REV
REV: Pressing the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key reverses the transmit and receive frequen-
cies during repeater operation.
HOME: Pressing the
[
HM/RV
(
EMG
)
R/H
]
key instantly recalls a favorite “Home” chan-
nel.
Set Mode Item 29
[
INT CD
]
Function: Selects the Access Number (DTMF digit) for WIRES
TM
operation.
Available Values: DTMF 1 - DTMF F
Default: DTMF 1
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 96
Set Mode Item 30
[
INT MD
]
Function: Selects the Internet Link Connection mode.
Available Values: SRG/FRG
Default: SRG (Single DTMF Digit is appended at the beginning of each transmission)
Set Mode Item 31
[
INT.A/M
]
Function: Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodialer feature while operating using the Internet
Connection feature.
Available Values: ON/OFF
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 32
[
INT.SET
]
Function: Selects the memory register for an Access Number (DTMF code) for non-
WIRES™ Internet Link System access.
Available Values: F 0 - F63
Default: F 1
Set Mode Item 33
[
LAMP
]
Function: Selects the LCD/Keypad Lamp mode.
Available Values: KEY/CONT/OFF
Default: KEY
KEY: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD for five seconds when you rotate the DIAL knob
or press any key or switch (except the PTT switch).
CONT: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD continuously.
OFF: Disables the Keypad/LCD lamp illumination.
Set Mode Item 34
[
LED LT
]
Function: Illuminates the STROBE glows continuously in white (useful as emergency
flashlight at night).
Set Mode Item 35
[
LOCK
]
Function: Selects the Control Locking lockout combination.
Available Values: KEY/DIAL/K+D/PTT/P+K/P+D/ALL
Default: K+D
Note: “K” = “Key;” “D” = “Dial;” and “P” = “PTT.”
Set Mode Item 36
[
M/T-CL
]
Function: Selects the MONI switch (just below the PTT switch) function.
Available Values: MONI/T-CALL
Default: MONI
MONI: Pressing the MONI switch causes the Noise/Tone Squelch to be over-ridden,
allowing you to listen for weak (or non-encoded) signals.
T-CALL: Pressing the MONI switch activates a 1750-Hz burst tone, used for repeater
access in many countries (especially in Europe).
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 97
Set Mode Item 37
[
MCGAIN
]
Function: Adjust the microphone gain level.
Available Values: LVL 1 - LVL 10
Default: LVL 5
Set Mode Item 38
[
MW MD
]
Function: Selects the method of selection of channels for Memory Storage.
Available Values: NEXT/LOWER
Default: NEXT
NEXT: Stores the data into the memory channel which is next-highest from the last-
stored memory channel.
LOWER: Stores the data into the lowest-available “free” channel.
Set Mode Item 39
[
NAME
]
Function: Toggles the display indication between “frequency” and the channel’s “Alpha/
Numeric Tag.”
Available Values: FREQ/ALPHA
Default: FREQ
Set Mode Item 40
[
NM SET
]
Function: Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory channels.
See page 35 for details.
Set Mode Item 41
[
ON TMR
]
Function: Set the ON Timer time.
Available Values: OFF/00H10M (00:10) - 24H00M (24:00) (10 minutes multiples)
Default: OFF
The ON Timer turns on the radio at the programmed time.
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 98
Set Mode Item 42
[
OPN.MSG
]
Function: Selects the Opening Message that appears when the radio is powered on.
Available Values: DC/MSG/OFF
Default: DC
DC: DC supply voltage
MSG: Set by user. See below.
OFF: No Opening Message
Here’s how to program the Opening Message:
1. Set this Set Mode Item to “MSG.”
2. Press the
[
MODE
(
SPS
)
SQ TYP
]
key momentarily to enable programming of the
opening message. You will notice the first character entry’s location blinking.
3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first letter/number of the message, then press the
[
MODE
(
SPS
)
SQ TYP
]
key momentarily to save the first letter/number and move on
to the next character.
4. Repeat the previous step as necessary to complete the message (up to six characters).
5. If you make a mistake, press the
[
BAND
(
SCN
)
BND DN
]
key to back-space the cur-
sor; now re-enter the correct letter/number.
6. When you have entered the desired opening message, press the
[
0
(
SET
)]
key momen-
tarily to confirm the message, then press the PTT key to save the settings and exit to
normal operation.
Set Mode Item 43
[
PAGER
]
Function: Enables/disables the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch function.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 44
[
PAG.ABK
]
Function: Enables/disables the Answer Back function of the Enhanced CTCSS Paging &
Code Squelch.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 45
[
PAG.CDR
]
Function: Setting the Receiver Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code
Squelch.
See page 60 for details.
Set Mode Item 46
[
PAG.CDT
]
Function: Setting the Transmitting Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code
Squelch.
See page 60 for details.
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 99
Set Mode Item 47
[
PSWD
]
Function: Programs and activates the Password feature.
See page ?? for details.
Set Mode Item 48
[
PTT.DLY
]
Function: Select the time delay between when the PTT switch is pressed and the carrier is
transmitted.
Available Values: OFF/20MS/50MS/100MS/200MS
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 49
[
RESUME
]
Function: Selects the Scan Resume mode.
Available Values: 3SEC/5SEC/10SEC/BUSY/HOLD
Default: BUSY
3SEC/5SEC/10SEC: The scanner will hold for the selected resume time, then resume
whether or not the other station is still transmitting.
BUSY: The scanner will hold until the signal disappears, then will resume
when the carrier drops.
HOLD: The scanner will stop when a signal is received, and will not restart.
Set Mode Item 50
[
RF SQL
]
Function: Adjusts the RF Squelch threshold level.
Available Values: OFF/S1/S2/S3/S4/S5/S6/S7/S8/S9/S9+
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 51
[
RPT
]
Function: Sets the Repeater Shift Direction.
Available Values: –RPT/+RPT/SIMP
Default: Depends on the transceiver version, as well as the setting of Set Mode Item 4:
ARS.
Set Mode Item 52
[
RX MD
]
Function: Selects the receiving mode.
Available Values: AUTO/N-FM/AM/W-FM
Default: AUTO (Mode automatically changes according to operating frequency)
Set Mode Item 53
[
RXSAVE
]
Function: Selects the Receive-mode Battery Saver interval (“sleep” ratio)
Available Values: 200 MS(1:1)/300 MS(1:1.5)/500 MS(1:2.5)/1 S(1:5)/2 S(1:10)/OFF
Default: 200 MS
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 100
Set Mode Item 54
[
S SRCH
]
Function: Selects the Smart Search Sweep mode.
Available Values: SINGLE/CONT
Default: SINGLE
SINGLE: The transceiver sweeps the current band once in each direction, starting on the
current frequency. All channels where activity is present (up to 15 in each direc-
tion) are loaded into the Smart Search memories. Whether or not all 31 memo-
ries are filled, the search stops after one sweep in each direction.
CONT: The transceiver makes a sweep in each direction as with the “SINGLE” mode,
but if all 31 channels are not filled after the first sweep, the radio continues
sweeping until they are all filled.
Set Mode Item 55
[
SCN.LMP
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Scan lamp while paused.
Available Values: ON/OFF
Default: ON
Set Mode Item 56
[
SHIFT
]
Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater Shift.
Available Values: 0.00 - 149.95 MHz (50 kHz increments)
Default: Depends on the operating band and transceiver version.
Set Mode Item 57
[
SKIP
]
Function: Selects the Memory Scan “Skip” channel-selection mode.
Available Values: OFF/SKIP/ONLY
Default: OFF
SKIP: The scanner will “skip” the flagged channels during scanning.
ONLY: The scanner will only scan channels that are flagged (Preferential Scan List).
OFF: All memory channels will be scanned (the “flag” will be ignored).
Set Mode Item 58
[
SPLIT
]
Function: Enables/Disables Split CTCSS/DCS coding.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
When this Set Mode Item is set to “ON,” you will see the following additional parameters
after the “RV TN” parameter while configuring Set Mode Item 60: SQL.TYP.
D CODE: DCS Encode only.
T DCS: Encodes a CTCSS tone and Decodes a DCS code.
D TONE: Encodes a DCS code and Decodes a CTCSS tone.
Select the desired operating mode from the selections shown above.
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 101
Set Mode Item 59
[
SQL
]
Function: Sets the Squelch threshold level.
Available Values: LVL 0 - LVL 15 (Narrow FM), LVL 0 - LVL 8 (Wide FM)
Default: LVL 1 (Narrow FM), LVL 2 (Wide FM)
Set Mode Item 60
[
SQL.TYP
]
Function: Selects the Tone Encoder and/or Decoder mode.
Available Values: OFF/TONE/T SQL/DCS/RV TN
Default: OFF
TONE: CTCSS Encoder
TSQL: CTCSS Encoder/Decoder
DCS: Digital Coded Encoder/Decoder
RV TN: Reverse CTCSS Decoder (Mutes receiver when matching tone is received)
Note: See also Set Mode Item 58: SPLIT regarding additional selections available during
“Split Tone” operation.
Set Mode Item 61
[
STEP
]
Function: Setting of the synthesizer steps.
Available Values: 5.0k/10.0k/12.5k/15.0k/20.0k/25.0k/50.0k/100.0k, or AUTO
Default: AUTO (Step automatically changes according to operating frequency.)
Set Mode Item 62
[
SU1.ALT
]
Function: Selects the measurement units for the altimeter (require optional SU-1), and
correcting the altimeter.
Available Values: M (meter)/Ft (feet), offset: –1000 to +1000
Default: Depends on the transceiver version.
Note: “OPTION” will be displayed if the SU-1 is not installed.
Set Mode Item 63
[
SU1.BRM
]
Function: Selects the measurement units for the Barometric Pressure (require optional
SU-1), and correction of the Barometric Pressure.
Available Values: HP (hpa)/MB (mbar)/HG (mmHg)/IC (inch), offset: –1000 to +1000
Default: Depends on the transceiver version.
Note: “OPTION” will be displayed if the SU-1 is not installed.
Set Mode Item 64
[
SU1.SET
]
Function: Selects the display of the sensor units’ information.
Available Values: OFF/BARO/ALTI
Default: OFF
Note: The barometric pressure (BARO) and altitude (ALTI) information require the op-
tional SU-1.
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 102
Set Mode Item 65
[
TEMP
]
Function: Indicates indicate the current temperature inside the transceivre’s case and se-
lects the measurement units (“°F” or “°C”) for the temperature sensor.
Set Mode Item 66
[
TN FRQ
]
Function: Setting of the CTCSS Tone Fre-
quency.
Available Values: 50 standard CTCSS tones
Default: 100.0 Hz
Set Mode Item 67
[
TOT
]
Function: Setting of the TOT time
Available Values: OFF/1MIN/3MIN/5MIN/
10MIN
Default: 3MIN
The time-out timer shuts off the transmitter after continuous transmission of the programmed
time.
Set Mode Item 68
[
TS MUT
]
Function: Enables/Disables the receiver audio output while the Tone Serch Scanner is
activated.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 69
[
TS SPD
]
Function: Selects the Tone Serch Scanner speed.
Available Values: FAST (2.5 tone/sec)/SLOW (1.25 tone/sec)
Default: FAST
Set Mode Item 70
[
TXSAVE
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Transmitter Battery Saver.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 71
[
VFO MD
]
Function: Enables or disables the VFO band edge limiting for the current band.
Available Values: BAND/ALL
Default: BAND
BAND: When the VFO frequency reaches the high band edge of the current band, the
VFO frequency will jump to the low band edge of the current band (or vice versa).
ALL: When the VFO frequency reaches the high edge of the current band, the VFO
frequency will jump to the low band edge of the next band (or vice versa).
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
CTCSS TONE FREQUENCY
(
Hz
)
67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7
82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4
100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8
123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2
151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9
171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2
189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5
210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8
250.3 254.1 – – – –
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 103
SET
(
MENU
)
MODE
Set Mode Item 72
[
WAKEUP
]
Function:
Available Values: OFF/5S/10S/20S/30S/EAI
Default: OFF
Set Mode Item 73
[
WX ALT
]
Function: Enables/Disables the Weather Alert Scan feature.
Available Values: OFF/ON
Default: OFF
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 104
General
Frequency Ranges: RX 0.5 - 1.8 MHz (BC Band),
(USA Version) 1.8 - 30 MHz (SW Band),
30 - 76(59) MHz (50 MHz HAM Band),
76(59) - 108 MHz (FM Band),
108 - 137 MHz (Air Band),
137 - 174 MHz (144 MHz HAM Band),
174 - 222 MHz (VHF TV Band),
222 - 420 MHz (ACT 1 Band),
420 - 470 MHz (430 MHz HAM Band),
470 - 800 (729) (UHF TV Band),
(757 - 774) (UHF TV Band),
800 - 999.990 MHz (ACT 2 Band; USA Cellular Blocked)
TX 144 - 146(148) MHz,
222 - 225 MHz (USA only)
430 - 440(450) MHz,
Channel Steps: 5/9/10/12.5/15/20/25/50/100 kHz
Frequency Stability: ±5 ppm @ 14 ºF to 140 ºF (–10 °C to +60 °C)
Repeater Shift: ±600 kHz (144 MHz), ±1.6/5.0/7.6 MHz (430 MHz)
Emission Type: F2D, F3E
Antenna Impedance: 50 Ω
Supply Voltage: Nominal: 7.4 V DC, Negative Ground
(Negative Ground) Operating: 5.0 ~ 16.0 V DC (EXT DC Jack)
11.0 ~ 16.0 V DC (EXT DC Jack with Charging)
Current Consumption: 150 mA (Receive)
(Approx. @7.4 V) 60 mA (Standby, Saver Off)
20 mA (Standby, Saver On)
1 mA (ON Timer Activated)
200 µA (Auto Power Off)
1.6 A (5 W TX, 144 MHz)
?? A (1.5 W TX, 222 MHz: USA only)
1.8 A (5 W TX, 430 MHz)
Operating Temperature: –4 ºF to 140 ºF (–20 °C to +60 °C)
Case Size: 2.3” (W) x 3.5” (H) x 1.1” (D) (58 x 89 x 28.5 mm)
(W/O knob, antenna, and belt clip)
Weight: 9.5 Oz (270 g) with FNB-80LI, and antenna
SPECIFICATIONS
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 105
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmitter
RF Power Output: High Low 3 Low 2 Low 1
144 MHz/430 MHz 5.0 W 2.5 W 1.0 W 0.3 W
222 MHz 1.5 W 1.0 W 0.5 W 0.2 W
Modulation Type: Variable Reactance F2D, F3E
Maximum Deviation: ±5.0 kHz (F2D, F3E)
Spurious Emission: At least 60 dB down (@ High power)
At least 50 dB down (@ Low 2 and Low 1 power)
Microphone Impedance: 2 kΩ
Receiver
Circuit Type: AM, NFM: Double-Conversion Superheterodyne
WFM: Triple-Conversion Superheterodyne
Intermediate Frequencies: 1st 2nd 3rd
AM, NFM: 47.25 MHz 450 kHz –
WFM: 47.25 MHz 10.7 MHz 1 MHz
Sensitivity : 3 µV TYP for 10 dB SN (0.5-30 MHz, AM)
(Cellular Blocked) 0.35 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (30-54 MHz, NFM)
1 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (54-76 MHz, NFM)
1 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (54-59 MHz, NFM: USA)
1.5 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (76-108 MHz, WFM)
1.5 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (59-108 MHz, WFM: USA)
1.5 µV TYP for 10 dB SN (108-137 MHz, AM)
0.2 µV for 12 dB SINAD (137-140 MHz, FM)
0.16 µV for 12 dB SINAD (140-150 MHz, FM)
0.2 µV for 12 dB SINAD (150-174 MHz, FM)
1 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (174-222 MHz, WFM)
0.5 µV for 12 dB SINAD (300-350 MHz, NFM)
0.2 µV for 12 dB SINAD (350-400 MHz, NFM)
0.18 µV for 12 dB SINAD (400-470 MHz, NFM)
1.5 µV for 12 dB SINAD (470-540 MHz, WFM)
3 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (540-800 MHz, WFM)
1.5 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (800-999.990 MHz, NFM)
Selectivity: AM, NFM: 12 kHz/35 kHz (–6 dB /–60 dB)
WFM: 200 kHz/300 kHz (–6 dB /–20 dB)
AF Output: 200 mW @ 8 W for 10 % THD (@ 7.4 V)
400 mW @ 8 W for 10 % THD (@ 13.8 V)
Specifications are subject to change without notice, and are guaranteed within the 144, 222,
and 430 MHz amateur bands only. Frequency ranges will vary according to transceiver
version; check with your dealer.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 106
“AUTO” MODE PRESET OPERATING PARAMETERS
FREQENCY RANGE
(
MHZ
)
MODE STEP
0.500 - 1.800 AM 10 kHz
1.800 - 30.000 AM 5 kHz
30.000 - 50.500 AM 5 kHz
50.500 - 59.000 FM 5 kHz
59.000 - 88.000 WFM 50 kHz
88.000 - 108.000 WFM 100 kHz
108.000 - 137.000 AM 25 kHz
137.000 - 144.000 FM 12.5 kHz
144.000 - 148.000 FM 5 kHz
148.000 - 156.000 FM 12.5 kHz
156.000 - 157.450 FM 25 kHz
157.450 - 160.600 FM 12.5 kHz
160.600 - 160.975 FM 25 kHz
160.975 - 161.500 FM 12.5 kHz
161.500 - 162.900 FM 25 kHz
162.900 - 174.000 FM 12.5 kHz
174.000 - 222.000 WFM 50 kHz
222.000 - 225.000 FM 5 kHz
225.000 - 300.000 FM 12.5 kHz
300.000 - 336.000 AM 100 kHz
336.000 - 420.000 FM 12.5 kHz
420.000 - 450.000 FM 25 kHz
450.000 - 470.000 FM 12.5 kHz
470.000 - 800.000 WFM 50 kHz
803.000 - 999.000 FM 12.5 kHz
USA Version EXP Version
FREQENCY RANGE
(
MHZ
)
MODE STEP
0.500 - 1.800 AM 9 kHz
1.800 - 30.000 AM 5 kHz
30.000 - 76.000 FM 5 kHz
76.000 - 88.000 FM 5 kHz
88.000 - 108.000 WFM 100 kHz
108.000 - 137.000 AM 25 kHz
137.000 - 160.600 FM 12.5 kHz
160.600 - 162.025 FM 25 kHz
162.025 - 174.000 FM 12.5 kHz
174.000 - 222.000 WFM 50 kHz
222.000 - 300.000 FM 12.5 kHz
300.000 - 320.000 AM 25 kHz
320.000 - 420.000 FM 12.5 kHz
420.000 - 430.000 FM 12.5 kHz
430.000 - 440.000 FM 25 kHz
440.000 - 470.000 FM 12.5 kHz
470.000 - 800.000 WFM 50 kHz
800.000 - 999.000 FM 12.5 kHz
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 107
1. Make sure that the transceiver is off. Remove the hard or soft case, if used.
2. Remove the battery pack.
3. Locate the connector for the SU-1 under the caution seal in the battery compartment
on the back of the radio, just peel off the caution seal.
4. Align the connector on the SU-1 with the transceiver’s connector and gently press the
unit into place.
5. Affix the new (supplied) caution seal, and replace the battery.
6. Installation is now complete.
INSTALLATION OF THE SU-1
(
OPTION
)
Important note
The Barometric Pressure/Altitude features of the optional SU-1 are designed to be
supplemental aids for the information of the user, and are not intended to be a
substitute for accurate, calibrated Barometer or Altimeter devices used for naviga-
tion critical to personal safety.
VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 108
NOTE
1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by VERTEX
STANDARD could void the user’s authorization to operate this device.
2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference including
received, interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily
being altered, by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated
to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22.
WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR
RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES
AND FEDERAL LAW.
DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER
The Scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted
or modified to a digital scanner receiver by any user.
Printed in Japan Copyright 2005
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
All rights reserved.
No portion of this manual
may be reproduced
without the permission of
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
0502d-0M
E H 0 2 1 M 1 0 0

Contents
General Description ..................................................... 1 Accessories & Options ................................................. 2 Controls & Connections .............................................. 3 Top & Front Panel ............................................................................ 3 LCD ................................................................................................... 4 Side & Bottom Panel ........................................................................ 5 Keypad ............................................................................................... 6 Installation of Accessories ........................................... 8 Antenna Installation .......................................................................... 8 Belt Clip & Hand Strap Installation ................................................. 8 Installation of FNB-80LI Battery Pack ............................................ 9 Battery Charging ............................................................................... 9 Installation of FBA-23 Battery Case ............................................. 10 Low Battery Indication .................................................................. 10 Interface of Packet TNCs .......................................... 11 Operation .................................................................... 12 Switching Power On and Off ........................................................ 12 Adjusting the Volume Level ......................................................... 12 Squelch Adjustment ....................................................................... 13 Selecting the Operating Band ........................................................ 14 Frequency Navigation .................................................................... 14 Transmission .................................................................................. 16 Changing the Transmit Power Level ...................................... 17 Changing the Microphone Gain Level ................................... 18 AM Broadcast Reception .............................................................. 18 AM Aircraft Reception .................................................................. 19 FM Broadcast/TV Audio Reception ............................................. 19 Advanced Operation .................................................. 20 Keyboard Locking .......................................................................... 20 Adjusting the Keypad Beeper Volume Level ............................... 21 Keypad/LCD Illumination ............................................................. 21 Changing the Channel Steps .......................................................... 22 Changing the Receiving Mode ...................................................... 22 RF Squelch ..................................................................................... 23 Checking the Battery Voltage ....................................................... 23 Repeater Operation ................................................... 24 Repeater Shifts ............................................................................... 24 Automatic Repeater Shift (ARS) .................................................. 24 Manual Repeater Shift Activation ................................................. 25 CTCSS/DCS Operation ............................................. 27 CTCSS Operation .......................................................................... 27 DCS Operation ............................................................................... 28 DCS Code Inversion ...................................................................... 29 CTCSS/DCS Bell Operation ......................................................... 30 Tone Search Scanning ................................................................... 31 Split Tone Operation ...................................................................... 32 Tone Calling (1750 Hz) ................................................................. 32 Memory Mode ............................................................ 33 Memory Storage ............................................................................. 34 Storing Independent Transmit Frequencies (“Odd Split”) ........... 34 Memory Recall ............................................................................... 35 Labeling Memories ........................................................................ 35 Memory Offset Tuning .................................................................. 37 Moving Memory Data to the VFO ................................................ 38 Masking Memories ........................................................................ 38 Memory Only Mode ...................................................................... 38 HOME Channel Memory .............................................................. 39 Memory Bank Operation ............................................................... 40 Direct Memory Recall Channel .................................................... 42 Short-Wave Broadcast Station Memory Channels ....................... 43 Weather Broadcast Channels ......................................................... 44 VHF-Marine Channels ................................................................... 45 Scanning ...................................................................... 46 VFO Scanning ................................................................................ 47 Setting the Squelch Level during activate Scanning Opertion 48 How to Skip (Omit) a Frequency during VFO Scan ............. 48 Memory Scanning .......................................................................... 49 How to Skip (Omit) a Channel during Memory Scan ........... 49 Preferential Memory Scan ....................................................... 50 Memory Bank Scan ................................................................. 51 Programmable (Band Limit) Memory Scan (PMS) ..................... 52 “Priority Channel” Scanning (Dual Watch) ................................. 53 Automatic Lamp Illumination on Scan Stop ................................ 54 Band Edge Beeper .......................................................................... 54 Weather Alert Scan ........................................................................ 55 Smart Search Operation ........................................... 56 Channel Counter Operation ...................................... 58 EPCS (Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch) ................... 60 Storing the CTCSS Tone Pairs for EPCS Operation ..................... 60 Activating the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch System .......... 61 Paging Answer Back ...................................................................... 61 Emergency Feature .................................................... 62 Emergency Channel Operation ..................................................... 62 Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature ...................................... 62 Selecting the EAI mode and its Transmit Time ..................... 63 Activating the EAI feature ...................................................... 63 To Locate an Unresponsive Operator Using the EAI Feature 64 ARTSTM (Automatic Range Transponder System) ....... 65 Sensor Mode ............................................................... 68 To display the Temperature ........................................................... 68 To display the Sensor Information ................................................ 68 Selecting and Correcting the Atmospheric Pressure Meter ......... 69 Selecting and Correcting the Altimeter ........................................ 69 Internet Connection Feature ..................................... 70 SRG (“Sister Radio Group”) Mode .............................................. 70 FRG (“Friendly Radio Group”) Mode .......................................... 71 DTMF Operation ....................................................... 73 Manual DTNF Tone Generation ................................................... 73 DTNF Autodialer ........................................................................... 73 CW Training Feature ................................................ 75 Miscellaneous Settings ............................................... 76 Password ......................................................................................... 76 Programming the “P” Key ............................................................. 77 Receive Battery Saver Setup ......................................................... 77 Wakeup Feature Setup ................................................................... 78 TX Battery Saver ........................................................................... 79 ATT (Front End Attenuator) .......................................................... 79 Disabling the TX/BUSY Indicator ................................................ 80 Automatic Power-Off (APO) Feature ........................................... 80 Automatic Power-On Feature ........................................................ 81 Busy Channel Lock-Out (BCLO) ................................................. 82 Transmitter Time-Out Timer (TOT) ............................................. 83 Changing the TX Deviation Level ................................................ 83 Reset Procedures ....................................................... 85 Cloning ........................................................................ 86 Set (Menu) Mode ....................................................... 87 Specifications ............................................................ 104 “AUTO” Mode Preset Operating Parameters ...... 106

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The VX-6R is a dual band heavy duty submersible transceiver with extensive receive frequency coverage, providing local-area two-way amateur communications along with unmatched monitoring capability. The VX-6R’s small size allows you to take it anywhere - hiking, skiing, or while walking around town - and its operating flexibility brings the user many avenues of operating enjoyment. Its incredibly compact FNB-80LI Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack provides up to 5 Watts of transmit power on 144 MHz and 430 MHz Amateur Bands. Besides 144and 430-MHz transceive operation, the VX-6R provides receive coverage of the AM (MF) and FM broadcast bands, HF Shortwave Bands, VHF and UHF TV bands, the VHF AM aircraft band, and a wide range of commercial and public safety frequencies! Further more, the USA version enables 1.5 Watts of transmitted power on the 222 MHz Amateur Band. New and exciting features of the VX-6R are the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) function, that will automatically cause your VX-6R to transmit your callsign and engage your rig’s microphone, even if you are disabled and unable to press the PTT switch; Enhanced Paging and Code Squelch (EPCS), that allows you to page a particular station and only receive calls from that station, if desired; and a security Password feature, that will allow you to turn on and operate your transceiver only after you enter your Password. Additional features include a convenient access key for Vertex Standard’s WIRES™ (Wide-coverage Internet Repeater Enhancement System), a transmit Time-Out Timer (TOT), Automatic Power-Off (APO), Automatic Repeater Shift (ARS), Yaesu’s exclusive ARTS™ (Auto-Range Transponder System) which “beeps” the user when you move out of communications range with another ARTS™ equipped station, plus provision for reduction of the TX deviation in areas of high channel congestion. And an RF squelch circuit allows the owner to set the squelch to open at a programmable setting of the S-Meter, thus reducing guesswork in setting the squelch threshold. We appreciate your purchase of the VX-6R, and encourage you to read this manual thoroughly, so as to learn about the many exciting features of your exciting new Yaesu hand-held transceiver! : JIS-6 Specification for submersibility: 3 ft. for 30 minutes

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL

1

This product is designed to perform optimally when used with genuine Yaesu accessories. 1. etc. “C” suffix is for use with 230-240 VAC.ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES FNB-80LI NC-72B/C CLIP-14 YHA-67 Operating Manual Warranty Card 7. Connection of any non-Yaesu-approved accessory.4 V. leakage or explosion of a battery pack. may void the Limited Warranty on this apparatus.. Availability of accessories may vary. should it cause damage. 1. Vertex Standard shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire.4 V. caused by the malfunction of non-Yaesu accessories. Some accessories are supplied as standard per local requirements.400 mAh Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack 2 x “AA” Cell Battery Case (batteries not supplied) Rapid Charger (requires NC-72B/C/U) 5-Hour Battery Charger DC Cable with Cigarette-Lighter Adapter DC Cable. Consult your Yaesu dealer for details regarding these and any newly-available options. plug and wire only Speaker/Microphone Waterproof Speaker/Microphone Ear piece/Microphone Microphone Adapter BNC-to-SMA Adapter Barometric Pressure Sensor Unit Soft Case : “B” suffix is for use with 100-120 VAC. while others may be unavailable in some regions. 2 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .400 mAh Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack 5-Hour Battery Charger Quick Draw Belt Clip Antenna AVAILABLE OPTIONS FNB-80LI FBA-23 CD-15A NC-72B/C/U E-DC-5B E-DC-6 MH-57A4B CMP460A VC-27 CT-91 CN-3 SU-1 CSC-91 7.

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 3 . The functions of the keys are described in detail on the pages to follow. During “Emergency Channel” operation (see page 62). Microphone The internal microphone is located here. as indicated on the next page. and also is used for menu selections and other adjustments. see page 96 for details. DIAL Knob This (inner) 20-position detented rotary switch is used for setting the operating frequency. Speaker The internal speaker is located here. Keypad These 18 keys select many of most important operating features on the VX-6R. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) The display shows current operating conditions. TX/BUSY Indicator Lamp This indicator glows green when the squelch opens. Do not allow the VX-6R to become submerged in water while the plastic cover over the MIC/SP jack is removed. and ground. POWER Switch Press and hold in this switch for one second to toggle the transceiver’s power on and off. this indicator can be useful as a flashlight in a dark environment via Set Mode Item 34: LED LT. Clockwise rotation increases the volume level. VOL Knob This control adjusts the audio volume level. this indicator will glow (or flash) white. earphone audio. (TOP & FRONT PANEL) MIC/SP Jack This four-conductor miniature jack provides connection points for microphone audio. and turns red during transmit. PTT.CONTROL & CONNECTIONS Antenna Jack Connect the supplied rubber flex antenna (or another antenna presenting a 50-Ohm impedance) here. Also.

& PO Meter Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature Active 4 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .CONTROL & CONNECTIONS (LCD) Memory Channel Number Skip Memory Channel or Repeater Shift Direction Preferential Memory Channel CTCSS/DSC Operation DMR Channel Recall Priority Channel Internet Connection Feature Active Operating Frequency Automatic Power-Off Active Key Lock Active Bell Alarm Active Battery Indicator Battery Saver Active Low TX Power Selected Dual Watch Active Secondary Keypad Active Operating Mode S.

then press this switch to enable to adjustment of the squelch threshold level. Battery Pack Latch Open this latch for battery removal.CONTROL & CONNECTIONS PTT (Push To Talk) Switch Press this switch to transmit. The center pin of this jack is the Positive (+) connection. Do not allow the VX-6R to become submerged in water while the rubber cap over the EXT DC jack is removed. allowing you to hear very weak signals near the background noise level temporarily. and release it (to receive) after your transmission is completed. EXT DC Jack This coaxial DC jack allows connection to an external DC power source (6-16V DC). (SIDE & BOTTOM PANEL) MONI Switch Pressing this switch disables the noise squelching action. Press the [F/W] key on the keypad first. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 5 .

band Starts the scanner upward (toward a higher frequency or a higher channel number) Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “1” Selects the CTCSS tone or DCS code number Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “2” Third Function (PRESS & HOLD KEY) Primary Function (PRESS KEY) Reverses the transmit and receive frequencies while working through a repeater Frequency entry digit “4” Frequency entry digit “5” Secondary Function (PRESS [F/W] + KEY) Activates the EMERGENCY function Activates the ARTSTM feature Selects the Memory Scan “Skip” channelselection mode Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “5” Third Function (PRESS & HOLD KEY) Switches to the “Home” (favorite frequency) Channel Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “4” Primary Function (PRESS KEY) Activates the Internet Connection feature Frequency entry digit “7” Frequency entry digit “8” Secondary Function (PRESS [F/W] + KEY) Selects the desired transmit power output level Activates the EPCS (Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch) feature Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “7” Activates the EAITM (Emergency Automatic ID) feature Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “8” Third Function (PRESS & HOLD KEY) Activates the Key Lockout feature 6 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .CONTROL & CONNECTIONS Moves operation to the next-highest frequency band (KEYPAD) Primary Function (PRESS KEY) Frequency entry digit “1” Frequency entry digit “2” Secondary Function (PRESS [F/W] + KEY) Moves operation to the Selects the synthesizer next-lowest frequency steps to be used during VFO operation.

CONTROL & CONNECTIONS Selects the Receive mode among AM.” or “simplex”) during repeater operation Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “6” Frequency entry digit “0” Primary Function (PRESS KEY) Activates the “Secondary” key function Engages the Set (Menu) Mode Secondary Function (PRESS [F/W] + KEY) Disables the “Secondary” key function Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “0” Third Function (PRESS & HOLD KEY) Activates the “Memory Write” mode (for memory channel storage) Frequency entry digit “9” Switches frequency control between the VFO and Memory Systems Primary Function (PRESS KEY) Enter the Special Bank mode Activates the “Memory Secondary Function Tune” mode while in (PRESS [F/W] + KEY) the Memory Recall mode Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “9” Activates the Priority (Dual Watch) function Third Function (PRESS & HOLD KEY) VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 7 . FM.” “+. and Wide FM (KEYPAD) Frequency entry digit “3” Primary Function (PRESS KEY) Activates the “User Programmed” mode Selects the DTMF mode Activates CTCSS or DCS Operation Secondary Function (PRESS [F/W] + KEY) No Action Stores the current setting into Direct Memory Recall Channel “3” Engage the Special Search mode Third Function (PRESS & HOLD KEY) Activates the Direct Memory Recall Channel function Frequency entry digit “6” Selects the direction of the uplink frequency shift (either “–.

hold the bottom end of the antenna. When installing the supplied antenna. as the supplied antenna is necessarily a compromise outside the Amateur bands. never hold the upper part of the antenna while screwing it onto the mating connector on the transceiver. However.5:1 or lower. To install the supplied antenna. If using an external antenna for transmission. and cannot be expected to provide high performance at all frequencies. then screw it onto the mating connector on the transceiver until it is snug. Do not over-tighten by use of extreme force. Notes: Never transmit without having an antenna connected. ensure that the SWR presented to the transceiver is 1.INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES ANTENNA INSTALLATION The supplied antenna provides good results over the entire frequency range of the transceiver. to avoid excessive feedline loss. BELT CLIP & HAND STRAP INSTALLATION 8 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . for enhanced reception on certain non-Amateur frequencies. you may wish to connect an antenna designed specifically for that frequency range.

AC line Outlet NC-72 E-DC-5B E-DC-6 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 9 . Replace only with the same or equivalent type. the optional E-DC-5B or E-DC-6 DC Adapter (with its cigarette lighter plug) may also be used for charging the battery. the FNB-80LI may be used for approximately 300 charge cycles. as personal injury or damage to the Li-Ion pack could occur if a cell or cells become accidentally short-circuited. If you have an old battery pack which is displaying capacity which has become diminished. 1) Do not attempt to open any of the rechargeable Li-Ion packs. as shown in the illustration. The display will indicate “CHGING. after which operating time may be expected to decrease. 2) Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. to the EXT DC jack. Install the FNB-80LI as shown in the illustration. or its charge is depleted. it may be charged by connecting the NC-72B/C Battery Charger. If only 12 ~ 16 Volt DC power is available. BATTERY CHARGING If the battery has never been used. Close the Battery Pack Latch on the bottom of the radio.INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION OF FNB-80LI BATTERY PACK The FNB-80LI is a high-performance Lithium-Ion battery providing high capacity in a very compact package. Under normal use. you should replace the pack with a new one.” and the TX/BUSY indicator will glow red. When charging is finished. while the battery is being charged. the display will change to indicate “CHGFUL” and the TX/BUSY indicator will glow green.

the NC-72B/C. indicating that the battery pack must be recharged before further use. 2) If you do not use the VX-6R for a long time. Alkaline batteries can also be used for transmission in an emergency. E-DC-5B. Avoid recharging Lithium-Ion batteries before the “ ” indicator is observed. 10 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . LOW BATTERY INDICATION As your battery discharges during use. with the Negative [–] side of the batteries touching the spring connections inside the FBA-23. The FBA-23 does not provide connections for charging. since Alkaline cells cannot be recharged. but power output will only be selectable 300 mW and 50 mW. as this can degrade the charge capacity of your Lithium-Ion battery pack. the voltage will gradually become lower. 1) The FBA-23 is designed for use only with AA-type Alkaline cells. remove the Alkaline batteries from the FBA-23. Open the Battery Pack Latch on the bottom of the radio. with the [+] side facing the bottom of the transceiver. When the battery voltage is becoming too low for reliable operation. or E-DC-6 may safely be connected to the EXT DC jack when the FBA-23 is installed. and battery life will be shortened dramatically. Close the Battery Pack Latch on the bottom of the radio. as battery leakage could cause damage to the FBA-23 and/or the transceiver. To Install Alkaline Batteries into the FBA-23 Slide the batteries into the FBA-23 as shown in the illustration.INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION OF FBA-23 ALKALINE BATTERY CASE (OPTION) The optional FBA-23 Battery Case allows receive monitoring using two “AA” size Alkaline batteries. Install the FBA-23 as shown in the illustration. Therefore. the “ ” icon will blink on the LCD display.

The audio level from the receiver to the TNC may be adjusted by using the VOL knob. per the diagram below. as the “sleep” cycle may “collide” with the beginning of an incoming Packet transmission. Remember to readjust the default microphone input level to “LVL 5” (Set Mode Item 37: MCGAIN) when Packet operation is finished. using the optional CT-91 microphone adapter (available from your Yaesu dealer) for easy interconnection to commonly-available connectors wired to your TNC. Be sure to turn the transceiver and TNC off before connecting the cables.INTERFACE OF PACKET TNCS The VX-6R may be used for Packet operation. You may also build your own cable. The input level to the VX-6R from the TNC may be adjusted via Set Mode Item 37: MCGAIN. See page 77 for details regarding Receive Battery Saver setup. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 11 . causing your TNC not to receive the full data burst. see page 18 for details. When you are operating on Packet. so as to prevent voltage spikes from possibly damaging your transceiver. switch the Receive Battery Saver OFF. as with voice operation. using a four-conductor miniature phone plug.

. 2. See page 21. 12 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Now. . 3. ADJUSTING THE VOLUME LEVEL Rotate the VOLUME control (inner knob) to set the desired audio level.MSG. see page 48 for details. but I encourage you to read the “Operation” section of this manual as thoroughly as possible. if you are using the FNB-80LI Battery Pack. Radio.OPERATION Hi! I’m R. and I’ll be helping you along as you learn the many features of the VX-6R.let’s get operating! SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF 1. Two beeps will be heard when the switch has been held long enough. the small “Lit” notation at the top of the display confirms that the Lithium-Ion Battery Pack has been detected. press and hold in the POWER switch again for one second. I know you’re anxious to get on the air. Clockwise rotation increases the volume level. Be sure the Battery Pack is installed. 1) If you don’t hear the two “Beep” tones when the radio comes on. the Beeper may have been disabled via the Menu system. Connect the antenna to the top panel ANTENNA jack. F. which tells you how to reactivate the Beeper. After this 2-second interval. Press and hold in the orange POWER switch (on the left side of the front panel) for one second. so you’ll get the most out of this fantastic new transceiver. and the current DC supply voltage will indicated on the display for 2 seconds. the display will resume its normal indication of the operating frequency. and that the battery is fully charged. 2) You can change the Opening Message (DC supply voltage indication) to any desired message (up to 6 characters) via Set Mode Item 42: OPN. To turn the VX-6R off.

Not only does the Squelch system make “standby” operation more pleasant. rotate the DIAL knob to set the Squelch so that the background noise is just silenced (typically at a setting of about “1” or “2” for FM and AM. This feature allows you to set the squelch so that only signals exceeding a certain S-meter level will open the squelch.OPERATION SQUELCH ADJUSTMENT The VX-6R’s Squelch system allows you to mute the background noise when no signal is being received. try using that mode for silent monitoring of busy channels. When you are satisfied with the Squelch threshold setting. Press the [F/W] key. 1) A special “RF Squelch” feature is provided on the VX-6R. press the PTT key momentarily to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. AM utilizes the setting chosen for FM. 2. See page 23 for details. 1. and “2” or “3” for Wide-FM). Or. This provides a “Short-cut” to Set Mode Item 58: SQL. 3. 2) If you’re operating in an area of high RF pollution. you may need to consider “Tone Squelch” operation using the built-in CTCSS Decoder. then press the MONI switch on the left side of the radio. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 13 . it also significantly reduces battery current consumption. if your friends have radios equipped with DCS (Digital Coded Squelch) like your VX-6R has. The Squelch system may be adjusted independently for the FM and Wide-FM (FM Broadcast) modes. This feature will keep your radio quiet until a call is received from a station sending a carrier which contains a matching (subaudible) CTCSS tone. Now. this is point of maximum sensitivity to weak signals.

174 MHz 137 . while counter-clockwise rotation will lower the operating frequency. BAND [BAND NUMBER] BC Band SW Band 50 MHz Ham Band FM BC Band Air Band 144 MHz Ham Band VHF-TV Band 222 MHz Ham Band 430 MHz Ham Band UHF-TV Band Action Band [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [ A] [b] FREQUENCY RANGE EXP VERSION USA VERSION 0. If you press the [F/W] key momentarily.222 MHz 222 . over which a number of different operating modes are used. you may initiate manual tuning (or scanning) per the discussion in the next chapter. Therefore. 2.137 MHz 108 .8 .470 MHz 470 .999 MHz 800 . then press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key.800 MHz 470 .1. 3.999 MHz To Change Operating Bands: 1. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key repetitively.174 MHz 174 . You will see the LCD indication move toward a higher frequency band each time you press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key.30 MHz 1. When receiving in the AM Broadcast or Shortwave bands (0.800 MHz 803 .222 MHz 174 .OPERATION SELECTING THE OPERATING BAND The VX-6R covers an incredibly wide frequency range. each of which has its own pre-set channel steps and operating modes. if you like (see page 22).108 MHz 88 .59 MHz 30 .30 MHz 30 . You can change the channel steps and operating modes later.470 MHz 420 . Three basic frequency navigation methods are available on the VX-6R: 1) Tuning Dial Rotation of the DIAL allows tuning in the pre-programmed steps established for the current operating band.137 MHz 137 . Clockwise rotation of the DIAL causes the VX-6R to be tuned toward a higher frequency. If you wish to move the operating band selection downward (toward lower frequencies).108 MHz 108 .8 MHz 0. press the [F/W] key first. a channelized system which allows free tuning throughout the currently-selected operating band. the VX-6R’s frequency coverage has been divided into different operating bands.5 .504 .420 MHz 222 .8 MHz 1.88 MHz 59 . for improved reception. we recommend that you connect an external antenna.420 MHz 420 .5-30 MHz). FREQUENCY NAVIGATION The VX-6R will initially be operating in the “VFO” mode.8 . Once you have selected the desired band.1. then rotate the 14 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .

g.OPERATION FREQUENCY NAVIGATION DIAL. press [0] [1] [5] [2] [5] [5] To enter 1. The scanning direction will be reversed. This only stops the scan. The VX-6R will then hold on that frequency according to the setting of the “RESUME” mode (Set Mode Item 48: RESUME). However. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 15 . so if the frequency is below 100 MHz (e. toward a lower frequency. See page 46 for details regarding Scan Operation. any required leading zeroes must be entered. 15. frequency steps of 1 MHz will be selected.000MHz. Press the PTT switch momentarily to cancel the scanning. rotate the DIAL one click clockwise. 2) Direct Keypad Frequency Entry The desired operating frequency may be entered directly from the keypad. There is no “Decimal point” key on the VX-6R. press [0] [0] [1] [2] [5] [0] To enter 0. there is a short-cut for frequencies ending in zero . and rotate the DIAL knob while holding in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key.150 MHz).250 MHz (1250 kHz). To enter a frequency from the keypad.255 MHz. instead of a higher frequency).950 MHz (950 kHz). to select the bandwidth for the VFO scanner. just press the numbered digits on the keypad in the proper sequence. Examples: To enter 146. then release the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to begin scanning toward a higher frequency. press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second. just rotate the DIAL one click in the counter-clockwise direction while the VX-6R is scanning.e. it does not cause transmission to occur. press [1] [4] [6] [5] [6] [0] To enter 15. If you wish to reverse the direction of the scan (i. To revert to scanning toward a higher frequency once more.press the [V/M(DW)MT] key after the last non-zero digit. press [4] 3) Scanning From the VFO mode. press [0] [0] [0] [9] [5] [0] [3] [V/M(DW)MT] To enter 430. The scanner will stop when it receives a signal strong enough to break through the Squelch threshold.520 MHz. This feature is extremely useful for making rapid frequency excursions over the wide tuning range of the VX-6R.

the relative power level will be indicated on the bar graph at the bottom of the LCD. you’ll get much longer battery life by switching to Low Power operation. press the PTT switch. which is described in detail on page 70. release the PTT switch. Additionally. The TX/BUSY indicator will glow red during transmission. Five bars indicates “Low 2 Power” operation and seven bars indicates “Low 3 Power” operation. described in the next chapter.S. and 430 MHz bands. “LOW 1” POWER “LOW 2” POWER 1) If you’re just talking to friends in the immediate area. and speak into the front panel microphone (located in the upper right-hand corner of the speaker grille) in a normal voice level. while deflection of three bars indicates “Low 1 Power” operation. more advanced aspects of transmitter operation will be discussed later (222 MHz: USA version only). 222 MHz (U. 2) Transmission is possible only on the 144 MHz. 222 MHz . the “LOW” icon will appear at the bottom of the display while operating on the “Low Power” settings. To transmit.A. To return to the receive mode. And don’t “LOW 3” POWER forget: always have an antenna connected when you transmit.OPERATION TRANSMISSION Once you have set up an appropriate frequency inside one of the 144 MHz. 1. 3) If other users report that you always have a DTMF “beep” at the “HIGH” POWER beginning of each transmission. Just press the [ (LK)TXPO] key momentarily to disable this feature. you’re ready to go on the air! These are the most basic steps. During transmission. or 430 MHz Amateur bands on which the VX-6R can transmit. full scale deflection confirms “High Power” operation. 16 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . version only). 3. 2. you may have accidentally switched on the “Internet Connection” feature.

5 W 1.OPERATION TRANSMISSION Changing the Transmitter Power Level You can select between a total of four transmitter power levels on your VX-6R.” in this configuration.0 W 1. Pressing the [F/W] key. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 17 . if necessary) to make the “HIGH” notation appear and restore High Power operation. After one transmission.5 W age supplied to the transceiver. the LCD shows no indication of the power output level. you can press the [F/W] key.0 W 80LI Battery Pack and external DC source.LOW 2 1.” or “LOW3” to appear. then press the PTT switch. the power out. Press the [F/W] key. will display the current power output level. while leaving 430 MHz on High power.HIGH LOW 3 2. 1) The VX-6R is smart! You can set up Low power on the 144 MHz band. With the standard FNB. Within one second of releasing the [ (LK)TXPO] key. The exact power output will vary somewhat.” “LOW2. the power level will revert to the previously-selected setting. 3. to cause the VX-6R to transmit (temporarily) on High power. The default setting for the power output is “High. followed by the [ (LK)TXPO] key (repeatedly.2 W To change the power level: 1. 2. followed by the [ (LK)TXPO] key. press the [ (LK)TXPO] key repetitively.0 W 0. And when you store memories.5 W put levels available are: LOW 1 0. so you don’t waste battery power when using very close-in repeaters! 2) When you are operating on the “Low” power settings. this will cause the power level “LOW1.3 W 0. you can store the power output settings separately in each memory. and the radio will remember the different settings on both bands. depending on the volt144/430 MHz 220 MHz 5.

2) The VX-6R includes a special memory bank into which the factory has stored 89 frequencies representing popular Short-wave Broadcast stations. you may change the operating mode by pressing the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key. 3.” USA Version 2. The MW coverage is 0. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 37: MCGAIN. The default setting is “LVL 5. Here’s how to set the level: 1. and speak at varying distances from the radio’s microphone. that allows you to set the Microphone Gain to the best level according to your operating preferences. you can hear the effects by monitoring on another radio tuned to your operating frequency. 4. 2.5 MHz to 1. Rotate the DIAL to tune across the broadcast band. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. try a setting or “LVL 3” or “LVL 4” while transmitting and speaking into the microphone. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the gain to a different level. while the shortwave broadcast coverage is 1. the operating mode (displayed on the bottom left of the LCD) should be shown as being “AM. 5. 18 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . press and hold in the [0(SET)] key for 2 seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation AM BROADCAST RECEPTION The VX-6R includes provision for reception of AM broadcasts. followed by the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key) repetitively until you see a frequency in the frequency range desired. You may also use the keypad to enter frequencies directly.OPERATION TRANSMISSION Changing the Microphone Gain Level Different operators speak at different voice levels. When you have made your selection. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key (or press the [F/W] key. In either case.” if you wish to reduce the level. This method will be quicker for changing from the 49-meter broadcast band to the 31-meter band. EXP Version 1) If the operating mode is not correct.8 MHz to 30 MHz. So as to compensate for these differences. for example. Press the [F/W] key. See page 43 for details. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. or on the shortwave bands up to 30 MHz.8 MHz. the VX-6R includes a Microphone Gain control. 1. either on the standard medium-wave (MW) broadcast band. 3.

See page 13 for details. 2. adUHF TV Band just the Wide-FM Squelch setting by pressing the [F/W] key. The default synthesizer steps for the W-FM mode are 100 kHz/step. if necessary). until you see a frequency in the aeronautical band. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key (or press the [F/W] key. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key (or press the [F/W] key. Since aeronautical channels are assigned in 25-kHz steps. Remember that frequencies quoted by aircraft operators may be abbreviated. 3. 2. 1. forty-two” corresponds to an operating frequency of 132. Rotate the DIAL to tune across the aeronautical band. To Activate FM Broadcast Reception 1. followed by the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key) repetitively until a frequency in the FM broadcast band appears on the display. VHF TV Band Remember that the Wide-FM Squelch setting may be made independently from the Narrow-FM setting. followed by the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key) (repetitively. therefore. 2. You may also use the keypad to enter frequencies directly.OPERATION AM AIRCRAFT RECEPTION Reception of AM signals in the aeronautical band (108-137 MHz) is similar to that described in the previous section. Rotate the DIAL to select the desired station. FM BROADCAST/TV AUDIO RECEPTION The VX-6R also includes provision for reception in the FM broadcast band. followed by the MONI switch while in the Wide-FM mode. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key (or press the [F/W] key. Rotate the DIAL to select the desired station. a frequency announced as “thirty-two.425 MHz. and that the “5” at the end of a frequency may be dropped. The total frequency range included in the “FM” band is 59-108 MHz. USA Version EXP Version To Activate VHF or UHF TV Audio Reception 1. followed by the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key) repetitively until a frequency in the VHF or UHF TV bands appears on the LCD. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 19 . utilizing a wide-bandwidth filter which provides excellent fidelity.

Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item. To activate the locking feature. 3. Press the [F/W] key. repeat this process. press and hold in the [ (LK)TXPO] key for 2 seconds. The “ ” icon will appear on the LCD. The possible lockout combinations are: KEY: DIAL: K+D: PTT: K+P: D+P: ALL: Just the front panel keypad is locked out Just the top panel DIAL is locked out Both the keypad and DIAL are locked out (factory default) The PTT switch is locked out (TX not possible) Both the keypad and PTT switch are locked out Both the DIAL and PTT switch are locked out All of the above are locked out To lock out some or all of the keys: 1. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. Rotate the DIAL knob to choose between one of the locking schemes as outlined above. To cancel locking. let’s learn more about some of the really neat features. 4. 2. 20 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . 5. KEYBOARD LOCKING In order to prevent accidental frequency change or inadvertent transmission. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 35: LOCK. various aspects of the VX-6R’s DIAL and keypad may be locked out. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation.ADVANCED OPERATION Now that you’re mastered the basics of VX-6R operation. When you have made your selection.

2. 3. The keypad beeper level changes according to the VOL konb setting. The reddish illumination yields clear viewing of the display in a dark environment. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 4. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 21 . 2. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 4. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation. To turn the beep back on again. However. Press the [F/W] key. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation. 4.” 5. Three options for activating the lamp are provided: KEY Mode: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD for 5 seconds when any key pressed. CONT Mode: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD continuously. KEYPAD/LCD ILLUMINATION Your VX-6R includes a reddish illumination lamp which aids in nighttime operation. Here is the procedure for setting up the Lamp operating mode: 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 9: BP LVL. select “ON” in step 4 above. Rotate the DIAL knob to select one of the three modes described above. When you have made your choice. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item. 2. 3.ADVANCED OPERATION ADJUSTING THE KEYPAD BEEPER VOLUME LEVEL A keypad beeper provides useful audible feed back whenever a keypad is pressed. Additionally. OFF Mode: Disables the Keypad/LCD lamp. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation. with minimal degradation of your night vision. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired level. if you want to turn the beep off: 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 7: BEEP. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. Press the [F/W] key. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 33: LAMP. you may adjust the volume balance between the receiving audio and keypad beeper via the Set mode. 6. Rotate the DIAL knob to change the setting to “OFF. 1. 3. 5. 5. Press the [F/W] key.

ADVANCED OPERATION CHANGING THE CHANNEL STEPS The VX-6R’s synthesizer provides the option of utilizing channel steps of 5/10/12. then press the [1(STEP)] key. the other step selections are disabled. FM: Frequency Modulation for receiving an Amateur Radio Station and most VHF/ UHF Communication. However. CHANGING THE RECEIVING MODE The VX-6R provides for automatic receiving mode changing when the radio is tuned to different operating frequencies. the procedure to do so is very easy. 3. Unless you have a compelling reason to do so. as well as an automatic step selection based on the current operating frequency (“AUTO”).300 MHz. The VX-6R is set up at the factory in the “AUTO” configuration. you may only select channel steps of 9 kHz or 10 kHz. 1.5/15/ 20/25/50/100 kHz per step. just press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key. 3) 5 kHz and 15 kHz steps are not available for use on 250 . which probably is satisfactory for most operation. This provides a “Short-cut” to Set Mode Item 61: STEP. 2. Press the PTT key to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. AM: Amplitude Modulation for receiving a Short-wave Broadcast Station and Air Band Communication. leave the Automatic Mode Selection feature on so as to save time and trouble when changing bands. if you need to change the channel step increments. Press the [F/W] key. If you make a mode change for a particular channel or station. The receiving modes available are: AUTO: Automatic mode setting per default values for the selected frequency range. 22 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . 2) While operating on the BC band. Rotate the DIAL to select the new channel step size. should an unusual receiving situation arise in which you need to change other receiving mode. any number of which may be important to your operating requirements. WFM: Frequency Modulation for receiving an FM Broadcast Station. as the mode setting will be memorized along with the frequency information. you can always store that one channel into memory. However. 1) 9 kHz steps are available only when receiving on the BC band. nor above 580 MHz.

or OFF). S7. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired signal strength level for the squelch threshold (S1. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to display the current DC voltage being supplied. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. To set up the RF squelch circuit for operation.ADVANCED OPERATION RF SQUELCH A special RF Squelch feature is provided on this radio. S8. Press the [F/W] key. This feature allows you to set the squelch so that only signals exceeding a certain S-meter level will open the squelch. Press the [F/W] key. 4. Press and hold in the [0(SET)] key for 2 seconds to return to normal operation. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 23 . 5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 16: DC VLT. use the following procedure: 1. Lit: FNB-80LI is in use. Edc: An external DC source is in use. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 50: RF SQL. 4. S9+. S6. 2. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. S2. S3. 2. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item. CHECKING THE BATTERY VOLTAGE The VX-6R’s microprocessor includes programming which will measure the current battery voltage. 3. S4. S9. S5. 3. 1.

4 148. Press the [F/W] key. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation.0 2-m USA Version 146. which causes the appropriate repeater shift to be applied automatically whenever you tune into the designated repeater sub-bands in your country.0 450. the shift may be 1.6 MHz. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON. usually located on mountaintops or other high locations. or 5 MHz (USA version). 3. ARS-Repeater Subbands 145.0 433.25. on the 430 MHz band. These sub-bands are shown below. For the 144 MHz band shift will be 600 kHz and 222 MHz band (USA version only) shift will be 1.REPEATER OPERATION Repeater stations. at the factory. To re-enable ARS: 1.0 145. 2. Depending on the part of the band in which you are operating.6 145. the repeater shift may be either downward ( ) or upward ( ).6 147. AUTOMATIC REPEATER SHIFT (ARS) The VX-6R provides a convenient Automatic Repeater Shift feature. provide a dramatic extension of the communication range for low-powered hand-held or mobile transceivers.20 440. you may have accidentally disabled it.1 145. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 4: ARS.6 MHz.0 147.00 433. REPEATER SHIFTS Your VX-6R has been configured. When you have made your selection.40 EXP Version 1 EXP Version 2 439. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item. 4.98 USA Version 70-cm USA Version 438. 7. The VX-6R includes a number of features which make repeater operation simple and enjoyable.45 24 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .92 224.5 146. and one of these icons will appear at the top of the LCD when repeater shifts have been enabled.6 147.m 223. If the ARS feature does not appear to be working.” 5. for the repeater shifts customary in your country.4 146. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.6 MHz.0 445.8 EXP Version 1.

6. then press the [6(RPT)] key. but still have Automatic Repeater Shift still engaged (see previous section). Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired shift among “–RPT. when you change frequency (by rotating the DIAL knob. Press the [F/W] key. don’t change the “default” repeater shifts using this Set Mode Item. If you make a change in the shift direction. as shown on page 34. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation. When you have made your selection. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the new repeater shift magnitude.REPEATER OPERATION MANUAL REPEATER SHIFT ACTIVATION If the ARS feature has been disabled. 5. Press the [F/W] key. 2. Turn ARS off if you do not wish this to happen. To do this. 3. When you have made your selection. 4. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. This provides a “Short-cut” to Set Mode Item 51: RPT. To do this: 1.” “+RPT. follow the procedure below: 1. Set the VX-6R’s frequency to the band on which you wish to change the default repeater shift (144 MHz or 430 MHz Amateur Band). 2. or if you need to set a repeater shift direction other than that established by the ARS. you may set the direction of the repeater shift manually. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and return to normal operation. Enter the transmit and receive frequencies separately. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 25 . If you just have one “odd” split that you need to program.” and “SIMP. Changing the Default Repeater Shifts If you travel to a different region. for example) the ARS will over-ride your manual setting of the shift direction. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item.” 3. you may need to change the default repeater shift so as to ensure compatibility with local operating requirements. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 56: SHIFT.

The configuration of this key may be set either to “RV” (for checking the input frequency of a repeater). to see if the calling station is within direct (“Simplex”) range. See page 45. 26 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . To do this. just press the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key. Press the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key again to cause operation to revert to normal monitoring of the repeater downlink (output) frequency. To change the configuration of this key. use Set Mode Item 28: HM/RV. You’ll notice that the display has shifted to the repeater uplink frequency. the repeater offset icon will blink. or “HM” (for instant switching to the “Home” channel for the band you are operating on).REPEATER OPERATION MANUAL REPEATER SHIFT ACTIVATION Checking the Repeater Uplink (Input) Frequency It often is helpful to be able to check the uplink (input) frequency of a repeater. While you are listening on the input frequency to the repeater using the [HM/RV(EMG) R/H] key.

9 192.3 71.4 the CTCSS frequency.9 171.3 254. 100. Press the [ F/W ] key. When “T SQL” is displayed.5 141. then press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to enable selection of the CTCSS/DCS mode. which mutes your VX-6R’s receiver (instead of opening the squelch) when it receives a call from the radio sending a matched CTCSS tone.8 118. Rotation of the DIAL knob one more “click” in step “2” above will cause the “T SQL” notation to appear. this means that the Tone SQueLch system is active.7 229. 1.5 167.5 203. and is very easy to activate.5 94.7 218.9 74.5 186.8 162.7 159. This helps prevent false activation of the repeater by radar or spurious signals from other transmitters.8 196. press the PTT switch to save the new setting. CTCSS setup involves two actions: setting the Tone Mode and then setting of the Tone Frequency.3 146.2 indicates the Tone Frequency you need to 151. These actions are set up by using the [MODE(SP S) SQ TYP] key and [2(CODE)] key. Rotate the DIAL knob so that the “TONE” indication appears on the display. This can help keep your radio quiet until a specific call is received.9 183. 4.1 225. We’ll discuss the Digital Code Squelch system shortly. 1) You may notice a “RV TN” indication on the display while you rotate the DIAL knob in this step. The “ ” icon will blink on the display when the Reverse Tone Squelch system is activated. this activates the CTCSS Encoder.2 be using (ask the re189.5 85. which may be helpful while operating in congested areas of the band. then press the CTCSS TONE FREQUENCY (Hz) [2(CODE)] key to enable adjustment of 67.0 103.2 110. is included in your VX-6R.5 91.4 88. this means that the Reverse Tone Squelch system is active.6 199. This tone system.0 69. When you have made your selection of the CTCSS tone mode.7 82. Rotate the DIAL knob until the display 123.8 97. for access to repeaters requiring a CTCSS tone.9 114. 2) You may notice a “DCS” indication on the display while you rotate the DIAL knob still more.8 6. Press the [F/W] key.4 77.5 206.0 127. 5.3 131.2 165.1 – – – – know the tone frequency).3 179. 2.8 136.5 107.CTCSS/DCS OPERATION CTCSS OPERATION Many repeater systems require that a very-low-frequency audio tone be superimposed on your FM carrier in order to activate the repeater. which mutes your VX-6R’s receiver until it receives a call from another radio sending out a matching CTCSS tone. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 27 .3 173. called “CTCSS” (Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System).1 233.4 156.6 241. 3.8 177.0 79.8 erator if you don’t 250.5 peater owner/op210.

some systems just use CTCSS to control access to the repeater. 2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired DCS Code (a threedigit number). Ask the repeater owner/opDCS CODE erator if you don’t know DCS Code. press 274 306 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351 the [F/W] key momentarily to save the 356 364 365 371 411 412 413 423 431 432 445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 503 new settings and exit 506 516 523 526 532 546 565 606 612 624 to normal operation. DCS OPERATION Another form of tone access control is Digital Code Squelch. 627 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 – – – – – – 28 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Press the PTT key to save the new setting. press the [2(CODE)] key momentarily to save the new settings and exit to normal operation. When you have made your selection. DCS requires that you set the Tone Mode to DCS and that you select a tone code. more advanced tone system which generally provides more immunity from false paging than does CTCSS. 5. or DCS. When you have made your selection. Just as in CTCSS operation. DCS is frequently quite useful in Simplex operation if your friend(s) use transceivers equipped with this advanced feature. but the VX-6R is not passing audio. repeat steps “1” through “4” above.CTCSS/DCS OPERATION CTCSS OPERATION 7. 245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271 6. but rotate the DIAL so that “TONE” appears . This is different than the usual method of restoring normal operation. Press the [F/W] key. if not. and it applies only to the configuration of the CTCSS/DCS frequencies. The DCS Encoder/Decoder is built into your VX-6R. 4. and operation is very similar to that just described for CTCSS. Press the [F/W] key. If the S-Meter deflects. 3.this will allow you to hear all traffic on the channel being utilized. then press the [2(CODE)] key to enable adjustment of the DCS code. but don’t pass it along when transmitting. 1. then press the [1(SQ TYP)] key to enable selection of the CTCSS/ DCS mode. if 023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 051 053 you are working simplex. just set up the 054 065 071 072 073 074 114 115 116 122 DCS Code to be the same as that used by 125 131 132 134 143 145 152 155 156 162 165 172 174 205 212 223 225 226 243 244 your friend(s). this activates the DCS Encoder/Decoder. Your repeater system may be configured for DCS. Your repeater may or may not re-transmit a CTCSS tone . Rotate the DIAL knob until the “DCS” indication appears on the display. It is a newer.

When you have made your selection. Small signal or power amplifiers having an odd number (1. DCS is sometime referred to by its different proprietary names. Inc. if you find that your receiver squelch does not open when both you and the other station are using a common DCS code. Press the [F/W] key. the output signal (phase) is inverted from the input. then rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ENABLE” (thus inverting the DCS Code). you or the other station (but not both) can try the following: 1. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. signal inversion can result in the complement of a code to be sent or received.). press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Connection of an external linear amplifier. While under most circumstances this should not occur (amplifier designs and industry standards take this into account). Remember to restore the default setting to “DISABLE” when done. DCS uses a codeword consisting of a 23-bit frame.) of amplification stages may result in inversion of a transmitted or received DCS code. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily. 5.4 bps (bit/sec). where it is now in widespread use. Occasionally. a registered trademark of Motorola. 5. Typical situations that might cause inversion to occur are: Connection of an external receiver preamplifier. so your receiver will remain muted until a matching DCS code is received on an incoming transmission. etc. Operating through a repeater. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 18: DCS RV. as the decoded bit sequence would not match that selected for operation. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 29 . 4. Switch the DCS off when you’re just tuning around the band! DCS CODE INVERSION The DCS system was first introduced in the commercial LMR (Land Mobile Radio) service. transmitted (subaudible) at a data rate of 134. Note that code inversion does not mean that any of the above listed equipment is defective! In certain amplifier configurations. 3. This prevents the receiver’s squelch from opening with DCS enabled.CTCSS/DCS OPERATION DCS OPERATION Remember that the DCS is an Encode/Decode system. 2. such as DPL® (Digital Private Line®. 3.

or “OFF. 5. Press the [F/W] key. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the desired number of rings of the Bell. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. Set the transceiver up for CTCSS Decode (“Tone Squelch”) or DCS operation. 4.CTCSS/DCS OPERATION CTCSS/DCS BELL OPERATION During CTCSS Decode or DCS operation. 6. 30 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 8: BELL. “CONT” (continuous ringing). When the CTCSS/DCS Bell is activated.” “3. 2. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. The available choices are “1. the “ ” icon will appear at the upper right corner on the LCD. the Bell will ring in accordance with this programming. 3. Press the PTT switch momentarily to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.” or “8” rings. Here is the procedure for activating the CTCSS/DCS Bell: 1.” “5. as described previously.” 7. When you are called by a station whose transceiver is sending a CTCSS tone or DCS code which matches that set into your Decoder. Adjust the operating frequency to the desired channel. you may set up the VX-6R such that a ringing “bell” sound alerts you to the fact that a call is coming in.

in the case of DCS. and audio will be allowed to pass. 3.” See page 102 for details. “ “ ” will appear on the display.” See page 102. In the case of CTCSS. You may listen to the (muted) signal from the other station during Tone Scanning when Set Mode Item 68: TS MUT is set to “OFF. Press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second to start scanning for the incoming CTCSS or DCS tone/code. When this happens. You can also change the Tone Search scanning speed. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 31 . it will continue to scan indefinitely. then press the [2(CODE)] key.CTCSS/DCS OPERATION TONE SEARCH SCANNING In operating situations where you don’t know the CTCSS or DCS tone being used by another station or stations. sions). 2. Set the radio up for either CTCSS or DCS Decoder operation (see the previous discus” will appear on the display. 4. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to lock in that tone/code. it may be that the other station is not sending any tone. DCS). then press the [F/W] key to exit to normal operation. When the radio detects the correct tone or code. Some repeaters do not pass the CTCSS tone. using Set Mode Item 69: TS SPD. You can press the PTT switch to halt the scan at any time. Two things must be remembered in this regard: You must be sure that your repeater uses the same tone type (CTCSS vs. Tone Scanning works either in the VFO or Memory modes. you can command the radio to listen to the incoming signal and scan in search of the tone being used. you may have to listen to the station(s) transmitting on the repeater uplink (input) frequency in order to allow Tone Search Scanning to work. To scan for the tone in use: 1. Press the [F/W] key. If the Tone Scan feature does not detect a tone or code. it will halt on that tone/code.

Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 58: SPLIT.CTCSS/DCS OPERATION SPLIT TONE OPERATION The VX-6R can be operated in a Split Tone configuration via the Set mode. 5. press and hold in the MONI switch for the amount of time specified by the repeater owner/operator. 32 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . When the Split Tone feature is activated. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “T-CALL” on the display. 2. Once access to the repeater has been gained. 3. 4. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. To access a repeater. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 36: M/T-CL. we again use the Set Mode to help us. To change the configuration of this switch. 5. Press the PTT key momentarily to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Press the [F/W] key. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. 3. 1. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. from the selections shown above. you can set the MONI switch to serve as a “Tone Call” switch instead. The transmitter will automatically be activated. 1. Press the [F/W] key. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. 4. TONE CALLING (1750 HZ) If the repeaters in your country require a 1750-Hz burst tone for access (typically in Europe). and a 1750Hz audio tone will be superimposed on the carrier. and use the PTT switch for activating the transmitter thereafter. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. you can see the following additional parameters following the “RV TN” parameter (while selecting the tone mode by pressing [F/W] [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP]): ” icon will blink during operation) D CODE: DCS Encode only (the “ T DCS: Encodes a CTCSS Tone and Decodes a DCS code (the “ ” icon will blink and the “ ” icon will appear during operation) D TONE: Encodes a DCS code and Decodes a CTCSS Tone (the “ ” icon will appear and the “ ” icon will blink during operation) Select the desired operating mode. 2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select ON (to enable the Split Tone feature). you may release the MONI switch.

50 sets of band-edge memories. 10 “Weather Broadcast” Channels. numbered “1” through “900. which made up of: 900 “Standard” memory channels.” 11 “Home” channels. which include: A “Emergency Automatic ID (EAI)” Channel. providing storage and quick recall of one prime frequency on each operating band. also known as “Programmable Memory Scan” channels. These include: Regular Memory Channels. Special Memory Channels.” 99 “Frequency Skip Memory” channels. 281 VHF Marine Channels. labeled “BANK 1” through “BANK24.MEMORY MODE The VX-6R provides a wide variety of memory system resources. Standard Memory Channels (900 channels) 889 900 Frequency Skip Memory Channels (99 channels) 998 999 PMS Memory Channels (50 Sets) L49/U49 L50/U50 DMR 9 DMR 0 EAI Channel (1 channel) EAI HOME Channels (11 channels) BC Band SW Band 50 MHz Band FM BC Band Air Band 144 MHz Band VHF-TV Band Action Band-1 430 MHz Band UHF-TV Band Action Band-2 Direct Memory Recall Channels (10 channels) Weather Broadcast Channels (10 channels) WX9 WX10 VHF Marine Channels (280 channels) Short-wave Broadcast Station Memory Channels (89 channels) VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL WX1 WX2 WX3 WX4 DMR 1 DMR 2 DMR 3 DMR 4 L1/U1 L2/U2 L3/U3 L4/U4 1 2 3 4 900 901 902 903 33 . 10 “Direct Memory Recall” Channels.” Each Memory Bank can be assigned up to 100 channels from the “standard” and “PMS” memory channels. labeled “L1/U1” through “L50/U50. numbered “901” through “999.” 24 Memory Banks. 89 Popular Short-wave Broadcast Station Memory Channels.

to designate memory channel #14. The power level may also be set at this time. Within five seconds of releasing the [F/W] key. if you wish to store to the designated memory channel. Within five seconds of releasing the [F/W] key. for operation on repeaters with non-standard shift. Storing Independent Transmit Frequencies (“Odd Splits”) All memories can store an independent transmit frequency. The microprocessor will automatically select the next-available “free” channel (a memory register on which no data has been stored). If you wish to select a different channel number into which to store the data. the channel is “free”). see page 97. To do this: 1.” L50 = “1099. you does not need pressing the [V/M(DW)MT] key. Turn to the desired transmit (uplink) frequency. if this is the case.e. and store them into additional memory locations.” U1 = “1002. 3. You still will be operating in the “VFO” mode.” and U50 = “1100. if you wish to store it.” Programmable Memory channels #L1 = “1001. Similarly. then press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. Press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second.” In this case. press [1] [4] [V/M(DW)MT]. Select the desired frequency. 34 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired memory channel. Be sure to set up any desired CTCSS or DCS tones. You may also designate the Memory Channel #000 and Programmable Memory channels (“L1/U1” through “L50/U50”) using the following numbers: Memory Channel #000 = “1000. then press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. rotate the DIAL knob to select the same memory channel number as used in step “1” above. Press the [F/W] key once more to store the frequency into memory. 2. an easy way to designated memory is to key in the memory channel number. you may jump 100 memory channels. while operating in the VFO mode. as well as any desired repeater offset. If you see a blinking memory channel number.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) MEMORY STORAGE 1. so you may not wish to make any change. by repeating the above process. proceed to step 4. it means that the channel currently has no data written on it (i. 1) You may change the automatic memory channel selection feature to select the “next-highest memory channel above the last-stored memory channel” by instead of the “next-available ‘free’ channel” via the Set Mode Item 38: MW MD. so you may now enter other frequencies. 2. Store the receive frequency (downlink) using the method already described under MEMORY STORAGE (it doesn’t matter if a repeater offset is active). 4. you need to make a decision regarding channel storage. if necessary). For example. if you’re in a hurry (101 201 301 …) by pressing the [P(DMR)] key (multiple times. 3. 2) In step 4 above. 5.

” and U50 = “1100.” U1 = “1002. then press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. 5. For example.” In these case. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable programming of the name tag. 2. 3. Whenever you recall a memory which contains independently-stored transmit and receive frequencies. press [1] [4] [V/M(DW)MT]. When the radio is already set to the Memory mode. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.” Programmable Memory channels #L1 = “1001. 8. then press the [F/W] key once more momentarily while holding the PTT switch in (this does not key the transmitter). you do not need to press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. etc. To return to the VFO mode. to aid in recollection of the channel’s use (such as a club name. an easy way to recall memories is to key in the memory channel number. Press the [F/W] key. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to program the remaining letters. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired label. 7. 2. 3. 6. While operating in the VFO mode. 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 40: NM SET.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) MEMORY STORAGE 4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired channel. to recall memory channel #14. 4. If you make a mistake. You may also recall Memory Channel #000 and Programmable Memory channels (“L01/ U01” through “L50/U50”) using the following numbers: Memory Channel #000 = “1000.” L50 = “1099. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to move to the next character.). number. Press and hold in the PTT switch. or symbol. numbers. the “ ” indication will appear in the display. or symbols of the VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 35 . press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to back-space the cursor. MEMORY RECALL 1. LABELING MEMORIES You may wish to append an alpha-numeric “Tag” (label) to a memory or memories. then re-enter the correct letter. Recall the memory channel on which you wish to append a label. press the [V/M(DW)MT] key to enter the Memory mode. This is easily accomplished using the Set Mode.

and the display returns to the alpha-numeric “Tag” display. 10. press the [0(SET)] key to confirm the label. When you have programmed a label which is under 6 characters. To disable the alpha-numeric Tag (enabling the frequency display). Press the [F/W] key. 5. rotating the DIAL knob to select “FREQ” in step 5 above. 3. 2. Set the VX-6R to the “MR” (Memory Recall) mode. Release the MONI switch. 9. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 36 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Press the PTT key to save the new setting and activate the alphanumeric Tag. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ALPHA” (thus enabling the alpha-numeric display). To display the alpha-numeric “Tag” (label): 1.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) LABELING MEMORIES desired label. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Set Mode Item labeled 39: NAME. press the PTT key to save the label and exit. and recall the memory channel on which you wish to display its label. A total of six characters may be used in the creation of a label. 4. 6. You may check the frequency of any Name-tagged channel by pressing the MONI switch. just repeat the above procedure. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Item’s setting. When you have completed the creation of the label.

3. The synthesizer steps selected for VFO operation on the current band will be the steps used during Memory Tuning. Rotate the DIAL knob. the display will automatically revert to display of the operating frequency. and you then press [F/W] again to lock in the new frequency. Press the [F/W] key. The Memory Channel number will be replaced by “tun. as desired. 1) If you want to replace the original memory contents with those of the new frequency. 1. so you can navigate without having to enter the Menu to change the display configuration. 2. With the VX-6R in the “MR” (Memory Recall) mode. to tune to a new frequency. 5. The display will revert to display of the alpha-numeric Tag (if any) that may have originally appeared on the LCD. then press the [V/M(DW)MT] key to activate the “Memory Tuning” feature. or repeater offset modifications. per normal memory storage procedure. 4. just press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 37 .” And if you have an alpha-numeric Tag displayed on the memory channel. The microprocessor will automatically set itself to the next-available clear memory location.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) MEMORY OFFSET TUNING Once you have recalled a particular memory channel. If you wish to store a new frequency set during Memory Tuning. just press the [V/M(DW)MT] key momentarily. If you wish to return to the original memory frequency. must be done before storing the data into the new (or original) memory channel location. select the desired memory channel. you may easily tune off that channel. as though you were in the “VFO” mode. be sure to rotate the DIAL knob to the original memory channel number! 2) Any required CTCSS/DCS changes.

Now. the TX frequency will be ignored (you will be set up for Simplex operation on the Receive frequency). then press the [ (LK)TXPO] key to restore the memory channel’s data. If a Split Frequency Memory channel was transferred. if you’re not careful. 1. To Unmask the hidden memory. turn the radio off. MEMORY ONLY MODE Once memory channel programming has been completed. deleting previous data. then rotate the DIAL knob to select the memory channel to be “Masked. press and hold in the [V/M(DW)MT] key while turning the radio on. at which time you can “Unmask” them for normal use. whereby VFO operation is impossible. Press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. 2. although the original memory contents will remain intact on the previously-stored channel. and ultimate simplicity of channel selection is desired. To place the radio into the Memory Only mode. if needed. Watch out! You can manually store data over a “Masked” memory. 1. repeat the above procedure: press and hold in the [F/ W] key for one second. Press the [ (LK)TXPO] key momentarily. then press the [V/M(DW)MT] key to activate the “Memory Tune” feature temporarily. several memories used only in a city you visit infrequently may be stored. Press the [F/W] key. The previously-selected memory will be Masked. 4. Use the “next available memory” technique (look for the blinking memory channel number) storage technique to avoid over-writing a masked memory. For example. rotate the DIAL to select the masked memory’s number. where a number of operators may be using the radio for first time.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) MOVING MEMORY DATA TO THE VFO Data stored on memory channels can easily be moved to the VFO. followed by the [ (LK)TXPO] key. repeat the above power-on procedure. To return to normal operation. 2. Press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. if you like. you may place the radio in a “Memory Only” mode. then “Masked” until you visit that city. 38 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . This may be particularly useful during public-service events. The display will revert to memory channel #1.” 3. then press the [F/W] key. MASKING MEMORIES There may be situations where you want to “Mask” memories so they are not visible during memory selection or scanning. The data will now have been copied to the VFO. to enter the MR mode. Select the memory channel containing the frequency data to be moved to the VFO.

000 MHz 860.000 MHz VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 39 .MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) HOME CHANNEL MEMORY A special one-touch “HOME” channel is available for each of operating bands. The power level may also be set at this time.000 MHz 59.540 MHz 1. 5. You may repeat this process on the other operating bands.000 MHz 30.000 MHz 174. 6. Press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. just press the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key.000 MHz 230.000 MHz 222. 3. The frequency and other data (if any) will now be stored in the special HOME channel register. Home Channel storage is simple to accomplish: 1.800 MHz 1. Select the desired frequency.000 MHz 470. if you wish to store it.000 MHz 146.000 MHz 860. Be sure to set up any desired CTCSS or DCS tones.000 MHz 470. 2.000 MHz 108.000 MHz 174. Change the setting of Set Mode Item 28: HM/RV from “REV” to “HOME. while operating in the VFO mode.” See page 62 for details regarding this feature. The UHF HOME channel is the one used during “Emergency Channel Operation. 4.000 MHz 430.000 MHz 446. While the memory channel number is blinking.520 MHz 144.800 MHz 30. BAND BC Band SW Band 50 MHz Ham Band FM BC Band Air Band 144 MHz Ham Band VHF-TV Band 222 MHz Ham Band 430 MHz Ham Band UHF-TV Band Action Band DEFAULT HOME CHANNEL FREQUENCY USA VERSION EXP VERSION 0.000 MHz 108.540 MHz 0. to allow quick recall of a favorite operating frequency on each band. as well as any desired repeater offset.” if it is not already set to this option (see page 95).000 MHz 88. To recall the HOME channel. press the [ HM/RV ( EMG ) R/H ] key momentarily while operating either in the VFO or MR USA Version EXP Version mode.

followed by the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key. Assigning Memories to a Memory Bank 1. now. 4. Press the [F/W] key.800 MHz memory channel data into the Memory Bank.500 MHz CH 3 435. to enter the Memory mode.500 MHz Bank “b24”). 2) The PMS memory channels (L1/U1 through L50/U50) may not be assigned to a Memory Bank. To change to another Memory Bank. You may enter and exit the “Memory Bank” mode by a single press of the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key. Fortunately. as we shall see below. you will observe that you can only select memory channels in the current memory bank. 2. so you can categorize the memories in a manner convenient to you. Memory Bank “5” Memory Bank Recall 1. 5. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key momentarily once more. 3. the VX-6R includes provision for dividing the memories into as many as 24 Memory Banks. if needed. as you rotate the DIAL knob to select memories. then rotate the DIAL knob to select the Memory Bank number (“b 1” ~ “b24”) you want as the Memory Bank for this channel. The Memory Bank number will appear on the display.000 MHz 4. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to activate the “Memory Bank” mode. then rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired Memory Bank (“BANK 1” through “BANK24”). followed by the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key.600 MHz Memory Bank “1” Memory Bank “2” 144 MHz Amateur Band Channels 430 MHz Amateur Band Channels Memory Bank “3” Memory Bank “4” Club Channels All Amateur Band Channels Air Band Channels 1 ) Yo u m a y a s s i g n o n e memory channel into several Memory Banks.800 MHz CH 6 436.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) MEMORY BANK OPERATION The large number of memories available in the VX-6R could be difficult to utilize without some means of organizing them. 40 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. then enter the following numbers: 1101 (for Memory Bank Memory Channel “b1”) through 1124 (for Memory CH 1 145.620 MHz CH 898 436.000 MHz CH 4 435. 3. CH 5 145. 2. press the [ F/W ] key. CH 897 145. Press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. rotate the DIAL knob to select the new Memory Bank. The small memory bank number will appear at the above of the frequency display while operating within a Memory Bank. Press the [ F/W ] key to copy the CH 7 128.000 MHz CH 2 145. Here’s a short cut for choosing the desired Memory Bank: press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second.780 MHz CH 899 128. Recall the memory channel to be assigned to a Memory Bank.

number. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily. 1. A total of six characters may be used in the creation of a label. The memories stored in the various Banks will remain in those banks. 6. When you have programmed a name which is under 6 characters. 4. Recall the memory channel to be removed from a Memory Bank. however. you do not need to store them again. press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to back-space the cursor. press the [0(SET)] key to confirm the label. Press the [F/W] key. press the PTT key to save the label and exit. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired label. 7.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNEL) MEMORY BANK OPERATION [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key momentarily. Changing a Memory Bank’s Name You may change the default Memory Bank Name which is indicates on the display while selecting the Memory Bank to your desired name. then rotate the DIAL knob to recall the memory bank on which you wish to change a label. 2. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to move to the next character. 3. then press the 6. without utilization of the Memory Banks. numbers. To exit from Memory Bank operation. 2. “MEMORY” will appear on the display. then press the [ (LK)TXPO] key to remove the memory channel data from the Memory Bank. 10. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 41 . Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to enable changing of the name tag. then re-enter the correct letter. 9. Press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. 8. When you have completed the changing of the name. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 10: BNK NM. just press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to program the remaining letters. If you make a mistake. or symbol. 5. Removing Memories from a Memory Bank 1. or symbols of the desired label. indicating that you are now in the “standard” Memory Recall mode. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.

including parameters such as CTCSS/DCS data. [0] 120. corresponding to the Direct Memory Recall Channel into which you wish to store this configuration. Once you have recalled a DMR channel.000 MHz 88.000 MHz [7] 222. you may KEY USA VERSION EXP VERSION rotate the DIAL knob to change frequencies.000 MHz 42 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . 2.520 MHz 145. by repeating the above process.000 MHz frequency.[4] 435. To exit the Direct Memory Recall Channel mode. Power Level etc. 2. an already-programmed memory. and store them into additional Direct Memory Recall Channels.540 MHz numeric key which was pressed in step 2. [3] 147. Press the numeric ([0] through [9]) key corresponding to the Direct Memory Recall Channel you wish to recall.000 MHz 430.000 MHz 439. Repeater Shift. If you wish to over-write the data stored on a par.000 MHz 120. just press and hold in (for 2 seconds) the [6] 446.000 MHz press and hold in the [P(DMR)] key for 2 seconds. DEFAULT DMR CHANNEL FREQUENCY 3.000 MHz 5.000 MHz 435. Storing the “Direct Memory Recall” Channels 1.500 MHz 4. [8] 0. or a Home channel. VFO. The “ ” icon will appear at the upper left corner of the display while operating on a Direct Memory Recall Channel.000 MHz 0. Press and hold in the [P(DMR)] key for 2 seconds to recall the Direct Memory Recall Channel mode. 3.000 MHz 144.500 MHz 145. or Home Channel). DMR channels may be selected from the VFO.MEMORY MODE (REGULAR MEMORY CHANNELS) DIRECT MEMORY RECALL CHANNEL The Direct Memory Recall Channel (DMR) feature allows you to recall up to ten favorite frequencies directly via the numeric ([0] through [9]) keys. You still will be operating in the “normal” mode (Memory. Press and hold in the numeric ([0] through [9]) key.500 MHz [2] 146.000 MHz ticular DMR channel after tuning off of the original [5] 440. as [1] 145.540 MHz 7. so you may now select other frequency. for 2 seconds. Recalling the “Direct Memory Recall” Channels 1. [9] 88.000 MHz though you were operating on the VFO. Set up the transceiver frequency according to the desired configuration.

220 AM SWISS 5.195 AM BBC 9.735 AM DENMRK 9.505 AM SWEDEN Radio Sweden 6. 4. 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Freq.410 AM BBC 12.925 AM BELGUM 11.435 AM ISRAEL Israel Broadcasting Authority 11.755 AM FINLND Radio Finland 9. to recall the Special Memory Channel Bank.985 AM BELGUM 9.790 AM FRANCE 11. 3. Press the [F/W] key.200 AM JAPAN Radio Japan 9.555 AM PORTGL 21. or press the [F/W] key followed by the [9(SP BNK)] key.955 AM CANADA 6.670 AM KOREA Radio Korea 6.735 AM DW 6.030 AM RUSSIA Voice of Russia 9.155 AM JAPAN Radio Japan 7.960 AM PORTGL 15.545 AM ISRAEL Israel Broadcasting Authority 6.020 AM NDELND 9.850 AM JAPAN Radio Japan 5.740 AM BELGUM 5. 2. You may view the channel frequency temporarily using Set Mode Item 36: NAME (set its parameter to “FREQ”).160 AM VOA 9.710 AM ITALY 3.585 AM ISRAEL Israel Broadcasting Authority 15.620 AM INDIA All India Radio (AIR) 15. for convenient selection of broadcast stations.920 AM SPAIN Radio Exterior de Espana 15.985 AM DENMRK 13.930 AM VOA 5.855 AM CHINA China Radio International (CRI) 11. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Freq.570 AM KOREA Radio Korea 13. To exit to normal operation.075 AM DW 9.660 AM ASTRLA Radio Australia 12080 AM ASTRLA Radio Australia VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 43 .955 AM DW 6.250 AM CHINA China Radio International (CRI) 9.065 AM SWEDEN Radio Sweden 9.655 AM NDELND 9.670 AM FRANCE 15.995 AM CANADA 7.895 AM NDELND 11.985 AM NORWAY Radio Norway International 13. MODE Tag (MHz) 6.515 AM ITALY 17.995 AM ASTRLA Radio Australia 9.625 AM SWEDEN Radio Sweden 17.580 AM ASTRLA Radio Australia 9.545 AM DW 9.595 AM INDIA All India Radio (AIR) 11.490 AM SWEDEN Radio Sweden 13.520 AM SPAIN Radio Exterior de Espana 11. 1.795 AM FINLND Radio Finland 5.615 AM ISRAEL Israel Broadcasting Authority 17.800 AM NORWAY Radio Norway International 6.045 AM INDIA All India Radio (AIR) 9.760 AM VOA 11.030 AM VOA 6.955 AM NDELND 6.310 AM BBC 6.020 AM INDIA All India Radio (AIR) 7.920 AM RUSSIA Voice of Russia 7. 5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select any of the 89 available Broadcast Stations.585 AM SPAIN Radio Exterior de Espana 6.MEMORY MODE (SPECIAL MEMORY CHANNELS) SHORT-WAVE BROADCAST STATION MEMORY CHANNELS A large number of Short-Wave Broadcast Station Memory Channels have also been preprogrammed at the factory.780 AM BELGUM 13. MODE Tag Station Name (MHz) 7.940 AM RUSSIA Voice of Russia 5.885 AM SWISS 15.485 AM NORWAY Radio Norway International 9.800 AM DENMRK 15.090 AM LUXBRG Radio Luxembourg 7. BROADCAST STATION FREQUENCY LIST Ch No.750 AM JAPAN Radio Japan 11.975 AM KOREA Radio Korea 7.985 AM SWISS 6.590 AM NORWAY Radio Norway International 9. then press the [9(SP BNK)] key.525 AM FRANCE 3.175 AM ITALY 9.045 AM FRANCE 9.095 AM BBC 15.165 AM SWISS 9.590 AM DENMRK 9.685 AM CHINA China Radio International (CRI) 5.270 AM SPAIN Radio Exterior de Espana 9.630 AM FINLND Radio Finland 11.190 AM CHINA China Radio International (CRI) 5. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to select “RADIO” (thus recalling the Broadcast Station Channel Memory Bank).780 AM PORTGL 11.735 AM CANADA 11.655 AM PORTGL Station Name Voice of America Voice of America Voice of America Voice of America Radio Canada International Radio Canada International Radio Canada International Radio Canada International British Broadcasting Corporation British Broadcasting Corporation British Broadcasting Corporation British Broadcasting Corporation Radio France International Radio France International Radio France International Radio France International Deutsche Welle Deutsche Welle Deutsche Welle Deutsche Welle Italian Radio International Italian Radio International Italian Radio International Italian Radio International Swiss Radio International Swiss Radio International Swiss Radio International Swiss Radio International Radio Vlaanderen International Radio Vlaanderen International Radio Vlaanderen International Radio Vlaanderen International Radio Nederland Radio Nederland Radio Nederland Radio Nederland Radio Denmark Radio Denmark Radio Denmark Radio Denmark Radio Portugal Radio Portugal Radio Portugal Radio Portugal Ch No.235 AM CANADA 9.275 AM KOREA Radio Korea 9.120 AM FINLND Radio Finland 9.205 AM RUSSIA Voice of Russia 12. press the [V/M(DW)MT] key.060 AM ITALY 7.

550 MHz 06 162. 5. 4. 44 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . press the PTT key once to halt the scan. See page 55 for details regarding activation of this mode.475 MHz 08 161.275 MHz by the [9(SP BNK)] key. When the scanner pauses on a sta. To exit to normal operation. the NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration) sends a weather alert accompanied by a 1050 Hz tone and subsequent weather report on one of the NOAA weather channels.CH FREQUENCY CH FREQUENCY tion. just press the PTT switch.500 MHz 02 165. for quick selection of NOAA weather information stations. VERSION) The VHF Weather Broadcast Station Memory Channel Bank has been pre-programmed at the factory.MEMORY MODE (SPECIAL MEMORY CHANNELS) WEATHER BROADCAST CHANNELS (U. such as severe thunderstorms and hurricanes. S. repeatedly if necessary to select “ WX CH ” (thus recalling the Weather Broadcast Memory Bank).775 MHz M(DW)MT] key. Press the [F/W] key. 3.525 MHz it once moore to restart the scan.450 MHz 10 163.425 MHz 09 161. If you wish to scan this bank to search for louder stations. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key.400 MHz 07 165.650 MHz 04 162. press 01 162. Severe Weather Alert In the event of extreme weather disturbances. to recall the Special Memory Channel Bank. then press the [9(SP BNK)] key. 2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired Weather Broadcast channel. or press the [F/W] key followed 05 162. 1. press the [ V/ 03 162.

MEMORY MODE (SPECIAL MEMORY CHANNELS)
VHF MARINE CHANNELS
Another special Memory Bank contains VHF Marine Channels, pre-programmed at the factory, for quick selection. 1. Press the [F/W] key, then press the [9(SP BNK)] key, to recall the Special Memory Channel Bank. 2. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key, repeatedly if necessary, to select “MARINE” (thus recalling the Marine Channel Memory Bank). 3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select any of the 280 available VHF Marine Channels. 4. To exit to normal operation, press the [V/M(DW)MT] key, or press the [F/W] key followed by the [9(SP BNK)] key.

VHF MARINE CHANNEL FREQUENCY LIST
CH Frequency CH Frequency CH Frequency CH Frequency CH Frequency CH Frequency CH Frequency (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) No. No. No. No. No. No. No. 0 156.000 41 158.050 82 157.125 123 159.075 164 160.100 205 161.125 246 155.875 1 156.050 42 158.100 83 157.175 124 159.100 165 160.125 206 161.150 247 155.850 2 156.100 43 158.150 84 157.225 125 159.125 166 160.150 207 161.175 248 155.825 3 156.150 44 158.200 85 157.275 126 159.150 167 160.175 208 161.200 249 155.800 4 156.200 45 158.250 86 157.325 127 159.175 168 160.200 209 161.225 250 155.775 5 156.250 46 158.300 87 157.375 128 159.200 169 160.225 210 161.250 251 155.750 6 156.300 47 158.350 88 157.425 129 159.225 170 160.250 211 161.275 252 155.725 7 156.350 48 158.400 89 157.475 130 159.250 171 160.275 212 161.300 253 155.700 8 156.400 49 158.450 90 157.525 131 159.275 172 160.300 213 161.325 254 155.675 9 156.450 50 158.500 91 157.575 132 159.300 173 160.325 214 161.350 255 155.650 10 156.500 51 158.550 92 157.625 133 159.325 174 160.350 215 161.375 256 155.625 11 156.550 52 158.600 93 157.675 134 159.350 175 160.375 216 161.400 257 155.600 12 156.600 53 158.650 94 157.725 135 159.375 176 160.400 217 161.425 258 155.575 13 156.650 54 158.700 95 157.775 136 159.400 177 160.425 218 161.450 259 155.550 14 156.700 55 158.750 96 157.825 137 159.425 178 160.450 219 161.475 260 155.525 15 156.750 56 158.800 97 157.875 138 159.450 179 160.475 220 161.500 261 155.500 16 156.800 57 158.850 98 157.925 139 159.475 180 160.500 221 161.525 262 155.475 17 156.850 58 158.900 99 157.975 140 159.500 181 160.525 222 161.550 263 155.450 18 156.900 59 158.950 100 158.025 141 159.525 182 160.550 223 161.575 264 155.425 19 156.950 60 156.025 101 158.075 142 159.550 183 160.575 224 161.600 265 155.400 20 157.000 61 156.075 102 158.125 143 159.575 184 160.600 225 161.625 266 155.375 21 157.050 62 156.125 103 158.175 144 159.600 185 160.625 226 161.650 267 155.350 22 157.100 63 156.175 104 158.225 145 159.625 186 160.650 227 161.675 268 155.325 23 157.150 64 156.225 105 158.275 146 159.650 187 160.675 228 161.700 269 155.300 24 157.200 65 156.275 106 158.325 147 159.675 188 160.700 229 161.725 270 155.275 25 157.250 66 156.325 107 158.375 148 159.700 189 160.725 230 161.750 271 155.250 26 157.300 67 156.375 108 158.425 149 159.725 190 160.750 231 161.775 272 155.225 27 157.350 68 156.425 109 158.475 150 159.750 191 160.775 232 161.800 273 155.200 28 157.400 69 156.475 110 158.525 151 159.775 192 160.800 233 161.825 274 155.175 29 157.450 70 156.525 111 158.575 152 159.800 193 160.825 234 161.850 275 155.150 30 157.500 71 156.575 112 158.625 153 159.825 194 160.850 235 161.875 276 155.125 31 157.550 72 156.625 113 158.675 154 159.850 195 160.875 236 161.900 277 155.100 32 157.600 73 156.675 114 158.725 155 159.875 196 160.900 237 161.925 278 155.075 33 157.650 74 156.725 115 158.775 156 159.900 197 160.925 238 161.950 279 155.050 34 157.700 75 116 158.825 157 159.925 198 160.950 239 161.975 280 155.025 35 157.750 76 117 158.875 158 159.950 199 160.975 240 162.000 281 155.000 36 157.800 77 156.875 118 158.925 159 159.975 200 161.000 241 162.025 37 157.850 78 156.925 119 158.975 160 160.000 201 161.025 212 155.975 38 157.900 79 156.975 120 159.000 161 160.025 202 161.050 243 155.950 39 157.950 80 157.025 121 159.025 162 160.050 203 161.075 244 155.925 40 158.000 81 157.075 122 159.050 163 160.075 204 161.100 245 155.900

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL

45

SCANNING
The VX-6R allows you to scan just the memory channels, the entire operating band, or a portion of that band. It will halt on signals encountered, so you can talk to the station(s) on that frequency, if you like. Scanning operation is basically the same in each of the above modes. Before you begin, take a moment to select the way in which you would like the scanner to resume scanning after it halts on a signal.

Setting the Scan-Resume Technique
Three options for the Scan-Resume mode are available: 3 SEC/5 SEC/10 SEC: In this mode, the scanner will halt on a signal it encounters, and will hold there for the selected resume time. If you do not take action to disable the scanner within that time period, the scanner will resume even if the stations are still active. BUSY: In this mode, the scanner will halt on a signal it encounters. One second after the carrier has dropped because the other station(s) ceased transmission, the scanner will resume. In the case of constant-carrier signals like Weather Station broadcasts, the scanner will likely remain on this frequency indefinitely. HOLD: In this mode, the scanner will halt on a signal it encounters. It will not restart automatically; you must manually re-initiate scanning if you wish to resume. To set the Scan-Resume mode: 1. Press the [F/W] key, then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 49: RESUME. 3. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. 4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired scan-resume mode. 5. When you have made your selection, press the PTT key to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. The default condition for this Set Mode Item is “5 SEC.”

46

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL

SCANNING
VFO SCANNING
1. Select the VFO mode by pressing the [V/M(DW)MT] key, if necessary. 2. Press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second, then rotate the DIAL knob while holding the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to select the bandwidth for the VFO scanner. Available selections are ±1 MHz, ±2 MHz, ±5 MHz, ALL, PMS-X, and BAND. ±1 MHz, ±2 MHz, ±5 MHz: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the selected bandwidth. ALL: The scanner will sweep all frequencies. PMS-X: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the currently-selected PMS frequency pair. See page 52 for details. Note: When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to the Low sub-band limit memory channel, the alphanumeric “Tag” will appear while you are selecting the bandwidth for the VFO scanner. BAND: The scanner will sweep frequencies only on the current band. 3. Release the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to start scanning. 4. If and when the scanner encounters a signal strong enough to open the squelch, the scanner will halt temporarily; the decimal point of the frequency display will blink during this “Pause” condition. 5. The scanner will then resume according to the Scan-Resume mode selected in the previous section. 6. To cancel scanning, press the PTT switch or [V/M(DW)MT] key. : When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to the Low sub-band limit memory channel, the alpha-numeric “Tag” will appear while you are selecting the bandwidth for the VFO scanner. 1) When you start the VFO Scanner, the VX-6R will be changing frequency in the upward direction. If you want to change direction of the scan while it is underway, rotate the DIAL knob one click in the opposite direction (in this case, one click counter-clockwise). You’ll see the scanner turn around and change frequency downward! 2) You may change the scanner’s method of operation so that the VFO frequency will jump to the low band edge of the next band when the VFO frequency reaches the high edge of the current band (or vice versa). See page 102 regarding Set Mode Item 71: VFO MD.

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL

47

999). press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. In this case. if needed. “S 1”) will appear in fine print above the frequency display). then rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired Frequency Skip Memory channel (901 .e. To skip a frequency during VFO scanning: 1. The microprocessor will automatically select the next-available “free” Frequency Skip Memory channel (a memory register on which no data has been stored). While VFO scanning is stopped (“pause” state) on the frequency that you do not need. pressing the PTT switch this one time will not causing scanning to stop. How to Skip (Omit) a Frequency during VFO Scan If the VFO scan stops on a frequency or frequencies that you do not need (such as a spurious radiation from a television). then rotate the DIAL knob to select the memory channel to be re-instituted. 2. to enter the MR mode. Press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. such frequencies can be “skipped” during VFO scanning. 48 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. Any channel with a blinking channel number is one that currently has no data written on it (i. this will re-institute the frequency into the VFO scan loop. Press the PTT switch momentarily to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Press the [ (LK)TXPO] key to delete the channel from the Frequency Skip Memory. press the [F/W] key. 2. 2. While the scanner is engaged. Press the [F/W] key to store the frequency into the Frequency Skip Memory. 3. the channel is “free”). 1. The VX-6R has 99 VFO Frequency Skip Memory Channels. To re-institute a frequency into the VFO scan loop: 1. then press the MONI key (the current squelch level (e.g. it now is programmed to be ignored during VFO scanning.SCANNING VFO SCANNING Setting the Squelch Level during active Scanning Operation The VX-6R allows adjustment of the Squelch level “on the fly” while you are scanning. Rotate the DIAL to select the desired Squelch level. This accomplished by storing these frequencies in a special “Frequency Skip Memory” bank reserved for this purpose. 3.

How to Skip (Omit) a Channel during Memory Scan Operation If the scanner repeatedly stops on a memory channel due to temporary noise or interference. followed by the [5(SKIP)] key while the scanner has stopped on the channel to be skipped. Press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. See page 52 for details. TAG1. Recall the Memory Channel to be skipped during scanning. it will then resume scanning according to the Scan-Resume mode set previously. Here is the procedure for skipping certain memories during scanning: 1. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 49 . the alpha-numeric “Tag” will appear while you are selecting the Memory Scan mode. As with VFO scanning. The scanner will instantaneously resume. Available selections are ALL CH. as the incoming signal will not pause long enough for the transceiver to resume scanning. press the PTT switch or the [V/M(DW)MT] key. 2. and PMS-X. if necessary. the “MS ERR” notation will appear on the display. TAG1: The scanner sweeps only those Memory channels with the same “first” digit of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on which scanning started. Release the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to initiate scanning. Set the radio to the Memory mode by pressing the [V/M(DW)MT] key. the scanner will halt on any signal encountered that is strong enough to open the squelch. TAG2. some continuous-carrier stations like a Weather Broadcast station will seriously impede scanner operation if you are using the “Carrier Drop” ScanResume mode. BAND: The scanner sweeps only those Memory channels which are memorized on the same operating band as the first channel on which scanning started. TAG2: The scanner sweeps only those Memory channels with the same “first” and “second” digits of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on which scanning started. 5. and that channel will not be scanned henceforth. you can mark it to be skipped by pressing the [F/W] key. ALL CH: The scanner sweeps all Memory channels. and rotate the DIAL knob while holding in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to select the desired Memory Scan mode. BAND. Note: When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to the Low sub-band limit memory channel. 2. PMS-X: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the currently-selected PMS frequency pair. 4. As mentioned previously. 3. Press the [F/W] key. To cancel scanning.SCANNING MEMORY SCANNING Memory scanning is similarly easy to initiate: 1. When there are no memory channels corresponding to the selected Memory Scan mode.

The “ONLY” selection is used for “Preferential Memory Scan. Press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 57: SKIP. When you recall the “skipped” memory channel manually.” 6. Rotate the DIAL knob so as to select “ONLY. TAG1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 57: SKIP. however. rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 5 above. 5. and rotate the DIAL knob while holding in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to select the desired Memory Scan mode.” The current Memory Channel will now be ignored during scanning. 3. 3. select “OFF” in step 5 above. TAG2. one by one. 6. press the PTT key to save the setting and exit to normal operation. Press the [F/W] key. Preferential Memory Scan The VX-6R also allows you to set up a “Preferential Scan List” of channels which you can “flag” within the memory system. Available selections are ALL CH. a small “ ” icon will appear at the left of the memory channel number.” described in the next section. and PMS-X. 4. using the DIAL knob or keyboard. These channels are designated by a blinking “ ” icon when you have selected them. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. It is still available for recall manually. Recall the Memory Channel which you wish to add to the Preferential Scan List. BAND. To re-institute a channel into the scanning loop. for the Preferential Scan List. To remove a channel from the Preferential Scan List. 4. 2. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 7. Rotate the DIAL knob so as to select “SKIP. 50 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . press the PTT key to save the settings and exit to normal operation. indicating it is to be ignored during scanning. if you are not using memories already. 5. To initiate Preferential Memory Scan: 1. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. When you have made your selection.SCANNING MEMORY SCANNING 3. Press the [V/M(DW)MT] key momentarily to enter the Memory Recall mode. just repeat the above procedure. When you have made your selection. 2. Here is the procedure for setting up and using the Preferential Scan List: 1. Rotate the DIAL to select any channel which has a blinking “ ” icon appended to the channel number.

Press the [V/M(DW)MT] key momentarily. Now. BAND: The scanner sweeps only those Preferential Memory channels which are memorized on the same operating band as the first channel on which scanning started. 3. if the Memory Bank Link Scan feature is enabled. 6. Memory Bank Scan When the Memory Bank feature is engaged. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first Memory Bank (“BANK 1” ~ “BANK24”) you wish to sweep using Memory Bank Link Scan. repeat steps 2 and 3 above. TAG1: The scanner sweeps only those Preferential Memory channels with same “first” digit of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on which scanning started. TAG2: The scanner sweeps only those Preferential Memory channels with same “first” and “second” digits of the alpha/numeric tag as the first channel on which scanning started. Repeat steps 3 and 4 above. Release the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to initiate Preferential Memory Scanning. Only the channels which have a blinking “ ” icon appended to the channel number will be scanned. you may sweep the memory channels in several Memory Banks which you have selected. A small blinking “ ” icon will appear at the left of the Memory Bank number. Set the radio to the Memory mode by pressing the [V/M(DW)MT] key. the alpha-numeric “Tag” will appear while you are selecting the Memory Scan mode. followed by the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to recall the Memory Bank. to delete the blinking “ ” icon from the Memory Bank number indication. PMS-X: The scanner will sweep frequencies within the currently-selected PMS frequency pair. the scanner sweeps only memory channels in the current Memory Bank. However. To enable the Memory Bank Link Scan feature: 1. 2. 7.SCANNING MEMORY SCANNING ALL CH: The scanner sweeps all Preferential Memory channels. To remove a Memory Bank from the Memory Bank Link Scan. See page 52 for details. to append the blinking “ ” icon to any other Memory Banks you wish to sweep. press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second to initiate the Memory Bank Link Scan. Press the [F/W] key. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 51 . indicating this Memory Bank will now be swept during Memory Bank Scan. 5. Note: When an alpha-numeric “Tag” is appended to the Low sub-band limit memory channel. 4. if necessary. 4.

300 MHz into Memory Channel #L1 (the “L” designates the Lower sub-band limit). Likewise. store 148. To exit from PMS operation.300 MHz to 148. then release the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key. the Memory Channel number will be replaced by “Pxx. 50 pairs of Band Limit memories. Here’s how to do this: 1.300 MHz.SCANNING PROGRAMMABLE (BAND LIMIT) MEMORY SCAN (PMS) This feature allows you to set sub-band limits for either scanning or manual VFO operation.000 MHz so as to prevent encroachment into the SSB/CW “Weak Signal” portion of the band below 144. if you like. 2. 6. store (per the above concept) 144. Please be sure only to store limit frequencies which are on the same band and set to the same frequency steps in both the upper and lower frequency limit memories. press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. Set the radio to the VFO mode by pressing the [V/M(DW)MT] key. you might wish to set up a limit (in North America) of 144. labeled L1/U1 through L50/U50 are available. Press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second. For example. 4. 52 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Releasing the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to initiates the Programmable (Band Limit) Memory Scan. 5.000 MHz into Memory Channel #U1 (the “U” designates the Upper sub-band limit). Using the techniques learned earlier. You therefore can set upper and lower operation limits in multiple segments on a number of bands. and (while holding the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key in) rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired PMS frequency pair (PMSxx). 3.” Scanning and tuning will now be limited within the just-programmed range. if necessary. 7.

Press and hold in the [F/W] key for one second. If a station appears on the Priority Channel. while periodically checking a user-defined Memory Channel for activity. Press and hold in the [V/M(DW)MT] key for one second. and every five seconds the VX-6R will check the Priority Channel for activity. Press the [V/M(DW)MT] key momentarily to enter the Memory Recall mode. The “ ” icon will appear to the left side of the memory channel number. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key. indicating it is the Priority channel while recalling the channel. 4 Now set the VX-6R for operation on another memory channel. however. the scanner will pause on that station in accordance with the Scan-Resume mode set via Set Mode Item 49: RESUME. 3. 6. If you are operating within a Memory Bank. The display will remain on the VFO or memory channel selected. as described previously. 5. If a station is received on the Memory Channel which is strong enough to open the Squelch. To exit from Dual Watch. then rotate the DIAL knob to select the memory channel you wish to be the “Priority” channel. the radio will pause on that channel. See page 46. Here is the procedure for activating Priority Channel Dual Watch operation: 1. 2.SCANNING “PRIORITY CHANNEL” SCANNING (DUAL WATCH) The VX-6R’s scanning features include a two-channel scanning capability which allows you to operate on a VFO or Memory channel. the “ ” icon will appear on the display. you must exit from Memory Bank operation by pressing the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key momentarily. if you are not using memories already. Home channel. press the [V/M(DW)MT] key momentarily VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 53 . or on a VFO frequency.

Press the [F/W] key. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “OFF. 54 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .LMP. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.SCANNING AUTOMATIC LAMP ILLUMINATION ON SCAN STOP The VX-6R will automatically illuminate the LCD/Keypad Lamp whenever the scanner stops on a signal. 3. increase the battery consumption. so be sure to switch it off during the day (the default condition for this feature is “ON”). The procedure for disabling the Scan Lamp is: 1. 3. Press the [F/W] key. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item.” 5. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON. Press the [F/W] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. When you have made your selection. Note that this will. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. When you have made your selection.” 5.BEP. this allows you to see the frequency of the incoming signal better at night. You may also enable this feature (band edge beeper) to sound the beeper when the frequency reaches the band edge while tuning using the DIAL knob. 2. of course. press the PTT key to save the setting and exit to normal operation. 4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 25: EDG. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 55: SCN. The procedure for enabling the Band-Edge Beeper is: 1. press the PTT key to save the setting and exit to normal operation. 2. BAND EDGE BEEPER The VX-6R will automatically “beep” when a band edge is encountered during scanning (either in standard VFO scanning or during PMS operation). 4.

the Scan-Resume mode is fixed to “TIME. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 73: WX ALT. To enable the Weather Alert Scan feature: 1. after which regular scanning will resume for another five seconds. scanning the Weather channels quickly in search of the Alert Tone. the VX-6R will check the Weather Broadcast Memory Channels for activity every five seconds while scanning. you’ll observe the scanner periodically shifting to the Weather Broadcast bank. Press the [F/W] key. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 55 . When you have made your selection. the VX-6R’s receiver will remain muted indefinitely unless the Alert Tone is received.SCANNING WEATHER ALERT SCAN This feature allows you to check the Weather Broadcast Memory Channels for the presence of the NOAA Alert Tone while operating using VFO scan or Memory channel scan. press the PTT key to save the setting and exit to normal operation. 1) When the Weather Alert Scan feature is engaged.” 2) If you are just scanning the Weather Broadcast Channels. This yields a long period of monitoring time.” 5. Rotate the DIAL knob so as to select “ON. 6. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. When the Weather Alert Scan feature is engaged. as no power will be consumed via audio output while scanning for the Alert Tone is in progress. To disable the Weather Alert Scan feature. 2. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. 4. 3. If you watch the display carefully. select “OFF” in step 4 above.

Setting the Smart Search Mode 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired Smart Search mode (see above). the transceiver will search above and below your current frequency. plus the current frequency itself). press the PTT switch to save the setting and exit to normal operation. storing active frequencies as it goes (without stopping on them even momentarily). 2. the transceiver will sweep the current band once in each direction starting on the current frequency. Press the [F/W] key. the radio will continue sweeping until they are all filled. whether or not all 31 memories are filled. 4. Set the radio to the VFO mode. 3. To recall the Smart Search memories. CONT: In this mode. consisting of 31 memories (15 above the current frequency. Storing Smart Search Memories 1. Be sure that you have the Squelch adjusted properly (so that band noise is quieted). 5. and the LCD will revert to Smart Search Memory Channel “C. 2. As active channels are detected. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 54: S SRCH. When you have made your selection. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. Press and hold in the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key for one second to begin the Smart Search scanning. the transceiver will make one pass in each direction as with OneShot searching. 4. these frequencies are stored into a special Smart Search memory bank. 3. however. When Smart Search is engaged. All channels where activity is present will be loaded into the Smart Search memories. Press and hold in the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key for one second. if all 31 channels are not filled after the first sweep. the Smart Search scan will eventually terminate. Depending on the mode you set for Smart Search operation (“SINGLE” or “CONT”).SMART SEARCH OPERATION The Smart Search feature allows you to load frequencies automatically according to where activity is encountered by your radio. you will observe the number of “loaded” channels increasing in the regular memory channel window. and rotate the DIAL knob while holding in the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to that “S SRCH” indication appears on the display: this activates the Smart Search feature. the search will stop after one sweep in each direction. rotate the DIAL knob to choose from among the 56 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Two basic operating modes for Smart Search are available: SINGLE: In this mode.” 6. 5. 15 below the current frequency.

. You don’t need to spend hours looking up repeater frequencies from a reference guidebook.just ask your VX-6R where the action is! VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 57 . . To return to normal operation. Smart Search is a great tool when visiting a city for the first time. press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key.SMART SEARCH OPERATION frequencies stored by Smart Search. 6.

only stations in close proximity may have their frequencies measured using this feature. The VX-6R performs a high-speed search within a ±5 MHz range from the frequency displayed on the LCD. 58 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . to tune precisely to the other station’s frequency. When the strongest signal in that range is identified. The frequency can be measured by bringing the VX6R close to the transceiver which is transmitting. 3. the frequency of the nearby station will be displayed. the transceiver will return to the frequency on which you were operating when you started Channel Counter operation. Therefore. 2. The radio will exit from Channel Counter operation. Release the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to begin the Channel Counter. When you are finished. Press and hold in the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key for one second. If it isn’t possible to determine the signal’s frequency. designed to provide a precise determination of the other station’s frequency. Note: This Channel Counter is designed to provide an indication of the operating frequency of the incoming signal. a 50 dB receiver front-end attenuator will be engaged. Set the radio to the VFO mode in the predicted frequency range for the transmitter to be measured. 1. 6. just press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key. however. and writes it into the special “Channel Counter” memory. thereafter. When the channel counter is active. the VX-6R displays the frequency of that (strongest) signal. 4. 5. This feature is not. without knowing that frequency in advance. and rotate the DIAL knob while holding in the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to that “CH CNT” indication appears on the display: this activates the Channel Counter feature. Bring the VX-6R into close proximity to the transmitter to be measured. one that is close enough to allow the user.CHANNEL COUNTER OPERATION The Channel Counter allows measuring of the frequency of a nearby transmitter.

Here is the procedure for setting the Channel Counter Bandwidth: 1. 5. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired bandwidth. Available selections are ±5. 3. 4. Press the [F/W] key. ±10. When you have made your selection. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. and ±100 MHz (default: ±5 MHz). 2. press the PTT key to save the setting and exit to normal operation. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 12: CH CNT. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 59 . ±50.CHANNEL COUNTER OPERATION Setting the Channel Counter Sweep Width You may change the bandwidth of the Channel Counter. Press the [F/W] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item.

35” and “35.5 69. if desired. 6.7 36 186.8 48 241.8 37 189.9 13 100.3 33 177. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Hz No. The squelch then opens so the caller is heard. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 45: PAG. on the paging radio. 2. You may re-activate the Enhanced Paging and Code Squelch system again using Set Mode Item 43: PAGER. your receiver remains silent until it receives the CTCSS tone pair that matches those stored in the Receiving Pager Memory.8 42 206. and to receive calls of your choice directed only to you (Code Squelch).5 20 127. Hz No.0 11 94.5 50 254.0 29 165. Meanwhile.2 34 179.6 49 250.3 12 97.3 43 210.2 46 229.5 17 114.CDT for the Transmitting CTCSS Tone Pair.3 91.2 25 151.9 47 233. Hz No. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item.9 26 156.1 60 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Hz 67. the CTCSS tone pair which is stored in the Transmitting Pager Memory will be transmitted automatically. CTCSS TONE NUMBER No. Storing the CTCSS Tone Pairs for EPCS Operation 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the CTCSS Tone number which corresponds to the first tone of the CTCSS Tone Pair.8 28 162.6 85.4 22 136.2 38 192. the Enhanced Paging and Code Squelch system will be disabled after the PTT switch is released after the paging transmission.8 88.5 24 146. the squelch will close automatically after the incoming page ends. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.4 35 183. The VX-6R does not recognize the order of the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. 10” to be identical. if activated. Basically.4 18 118.7 74. When you close the PTT switch to transmit.5 32 173.9 44 218. then rotate the DIAL knob to set the CTCSS Tone number which corresponds to the second tone of the CTCSS Tone Pair.5 71.5 39 196.4 14 103. Press the [F/W] key.CDR for the Receiving CTCSS Tone Pair or Set Mode Item 46: PAG. On the paged radio. In other words.3 41 203. 5.8 31 171.0 15 107. and the paging ringer immediately sounds.8 27 159.5 45 225. The paging and code squelch systems use two pairs of (alternately switched) CTCSS tones which are stored in the pager memories.8 21 131.9 40 199. Hz No.7 16 110.1 82.7 79.EPCS (ENHANCED PAGING & CODE SQUELCH) The VX-6R includes an Enhanced CTCSS tone encoder/decoder and a dedicated microprocessor providing paging and selective calling feature. the VX-6R considers both CTCSS pairs “10. This allows you to place a call to a specific station (Paging).0 23 141.3 30 167. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key.5 19 123. for example. 3. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. 4.1 77.

When the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch feature is activated.201(b) of the FCC’s rules governing the Amateur service before utilizing this feature on the 144 MHz band. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON.EPCS (ENHANCED PAGING & CODE SQUELCH) Activating the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch System 1. 3. 6. Paging Answer Back When you press the PTT switch to respond to a page call. 2. The Paging Answer Back feature constitutes a form of “remote control” operation that may be restricted to certain frequencies. you can have the VX-6R respond to page calls automatically (“transpond”). users should confirm the current status of §97. the VX-6R transmits the same CTCSS tone pair. If you prefer. as described previously. you may set up the VX-6R such that a ringing “bell” sound alerts you to the fact that a call is coming in. Press the [F/W] key. 4. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and activate the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 44: PAG.S. This tone pair will open the Code Squelch of the calling station.” 5.ABK. 3. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. U. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 43: PAGER. just repeat the above procedure. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. To disable the Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch.” 5. the “P ” notation will appear at the 100 MHz digit of the frequency display. 4. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. See page 30 for details. During Enhanced Paging & Code Squelch operation. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 61 . rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above. Press the [F/W] key. To enable this feature: 1. 2.

S. if necessary. (C) it flashes the TX/BUSY indicator in white. and (E) two seconds after the PTT release. the radio of the incapacitated party. the radio will automatically transmit a brief (0. The callsign of the incapacitated person will also be transmitted. (B) it emits a loud “Alarm” sound (the volume is controlled by the VOL knob). See page 39 for details on setting the Home channel.5 second) beep tone every 2. the Emergency feature will resume. so that others can provide assistance to a fallen team member. 1) Be sure to arrange with a friend or family member to be monitoring on the same frequency. To disable the “Emergency” feature. Use this feature if you are out for a walk and want a quick way of alerting a family member as to a dangerous situation. to assist the rescue team. In such cases. you will disable the Emergency feature temporarily. pressing and holding in the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key for one second or turn the radio off by pressing the POWER switch. as there will be no identification sent via the Emergency alarm sound. In the Interval mode. if another searcher sends out a unique command (CTCSS tone pair). when the VX-6R receives the CTCSS tone pair which is stored in the Receiving Pager Code Memory (configured via Set Mode Item 45: PAG. When this is done. who may not be able to speak or even press the PTT switch. all members should engage the EAI feature on their transceiver.EMERGENCY FEATURE EMERGENCY CHANNEL OPERATION The VX-6R includes an “Emergency” feature which may be useful if you have someone monitoring on the same frequency as your transceiver’s UHF “Home” channel. The “Emergency” feature is activated by pressing and holding in the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key for one second. see page 95 for details.CDR) on the frequency which is stored in Memory Channel “EAI” for more than five seconds. especially search-and-rescue personnel who may have become injured in a debris field. EMERGENCY AUTOMATIC ID (EAI) FEATURE The Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) feature can be used for searching for persons who are incapacitated in disasters like earthquakes. will automatically cause the injured party’s radio to transmit.5 seconds until the EAI 62 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . you can then transmit on the UHF Home channel. (D) if you press the PTT switch. The Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature has two operating modes: (1) Interval mode and (2) Continuous mode. (A) the radio is placed on the UHF amateur band Home channel. The alarm sound may discourage an attacker and allow you to escape. And do not transmit the alarm tone except in a true emergency! 2) The “Emergency” feature may be changed to another function via Set Mode Item 26: EMG. If an emergency group is working in a dangerous area. so others may perform direction-finding and effect a rescue.

Activating the EAI feature 1. The callsign or name will be transmitted every 10 minutes. 3. and (2) store the desired UHF coordination frequency into Memory Channel “EAI” (see page 34 for procedure). Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. such as a name. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired EAI mode (Interval EAI “INT”or Continuous EAI “CON”) and its transmit time (110. at the power level stored in that memory channel. 4. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 15. 4. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. 3. After sending the callsign or name. Furthermore. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 23: EAI. Selecting the EAI mode and its Transmit Time 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “ON” (thus activating the EAI feature). until the EAI timer expiration. 5. 2. The Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature requires that you (1) store the CTCSS Tone Pair into the Receiving Pager Memory (see page 60 for procedure).CDR) on the frequency which is stored in Memory Channel “EAI” for more than five seconds. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit from the VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 63 . it is NOT necessary for the incapacitated person to press the PTT switch. In the Continuous mode. Press the [F/W] key. 20. the radio will transmit your callsign on the air when the EAI feature is first engaged by the remote page.EMERGENCY FEATURE EMERGENCY AUTOMATIC ID (EAI) FEATURE timer expiration at the power level stored in that memory channel.TMR. and 50 minutes). 30. Press the [F/W] key. when the VX-6R receives the CTCSS tone pair which is stored in the Receiving Pager Code Memory (configured via Set Mode Item 45: PAG. The “callsign” ID can be changed to any desired sequence of characters. the radio will repeatedly transmit three tones for a user-defined period of time (between 1 and 30 minutes). 2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 24: EAI. the radio will automatically transmit (with maximum microphone gain) continuously. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 5. 40. it is NOT necessary for the incapacitated person to press the PTT switch. if your call sign is stored in the radio and enabling the CW identifier via Set Mode Item 14: CW ID. and every 10 minutes thereafter.

then press the [2(CODE)] key to enable adjustment of the Transmitting Pager Memory. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first tone.” “ATT 2 (50 dB). Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key. This key function is used to locate an unresponsive operator. described in the next chapter. 3. Set the CTCSS tone pair which is the same CTCSS tone pair stored in the Receiving Pager Code Memory of the missing person's radio.” To Locate an Unresponsive Operator Using the EAI feature 1. 5.” and “ATT OFF” by pressing the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to reduce the signal. 4. as peaks in weaker signals are more easily observed). Rotate the DIAL knob to select the second tone.EMERGENCY FEATURE EMERGENCY AUTOMATIC ID (EAI) FEATURE Set mode. rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step “4” above. to exit to normal operation. You may select the ATT (Front End Attenuator) level among “ATT 1 (10 dB). and its transmitter will respond repetitively.” or (4) a VHF frequency is stored in Memory Channel “EAI. 64 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . then press the [8(EAI)] key to recall Memory Channel “EAI” (of the searched person’s radio). D. The lost operator’s radio will beep loudly. A. You may now begin direction-finding efforts. 2) The VX-6R will ignore the EAI feature when the (1) the squelch is open. To disable the EAI feature. Press the [F/W] key. just repeat above procedure. Press the [F/W] key. 2. followed by the [8(EAI)] key. The ATT is often useful in helping you locate the missing person’s radio. then press the [8(EAI)] key. (3) the operating frequency is the same as the frequency which is stored in the Memory Channel “EAI. the “ ” icon will appear at the bottom right on the LCD. When the EAI feature is activated. 5. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit from setting mode. 1) Do not activate the EAI feature by pressing the [F/W] key. (2) there is an incoming the signal on the operating frequency. C. Press the [F/W] key. Press and hold in the PTT switch for five seconds to find out the persons who are activating the EAI feature. B.

so as to comply with identification requirements. you can have your radio transmit your callsign via CW. where is important to stay in contact with other members of your group. Basic ARTS™ Setup and Operation 1. ARTS™ operation has now commenced. Press the [F/W] key. Every 25 seconds. 3. Press the [F/W] key momentarily to exit ARTS™ operation and resume normal functioning of the transceiver. If you move out of range for more than one minute (four pollings). Alert ringers may be activated. your radio will transmit a “polling” call to the other station. and the display will revert to “OUTRNG. 2. During ARTS™ operation. your radio will sense that no signal has been received. and the display will change back to the “IN RNG” indication. DCS will also be deactivated (if you were not using it previously in non-ARTS™ operation). then press the [4(ARTS)] key. your radio will transmit a signal which includes a (subaudible) DCS signal for about 1 second. or every 25 (or 15) seconds after ARTS™ is activated. it is not possible to change the operating frequency or other settings.” If you move back into range. This may be particularly useful during Search-and Rescue situations. three beeps will sound. This is a safety feature designed to prevent accidental loss of contact due to channel change. 4. When ARTS™ is de-activated. Every 10 minutes. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 65 . per the discussion on page ??. if desired.ARTS™ (AUTOMATIC RANGE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM) The ARTS™ feature uses DCS signaling to inform both parties when you and another ARTS™-equipped station are within communications range. You will observe the “OUTRNG” display on the LCD below the operating frequency. your radio will again beep. Whether you talk or not. moreover. Both stations must set up their DCS codes to the same code number. the polling every 15 or 25 seconds will continue until you de-activate ARTS™. you must terminate ARTS™ in order to resume normal operation. etc. If the other radio is in range. Whenever you push the PTT. Set your radio and the other radio(s) to the same DCS code number. When that station responds with its own ARTS™ polling signal. the beeper will sound (if enabled) and the display will show “IN RNG” as opposed to the out of range display “OUTRNG” in which ARTS™ operation begins. then activate their ARTS™ feature using the command appropriate for their radio. the display will change to “IN RNG” to confirm that the other station’s polling code was received in response to yours.

U. Depending on your location and the potential annoyance associated with frequent beeps. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 2: AR BEP. When you have made your selection. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired polling interval (15 or 25 seconds). ALWAYS: Every time a polling transmission is received from the other station. 5. because the polling signal is sent out less frequently. 2. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. OFF: No alert beeps will be heard.ARTS™ (AUTOMATIC RANGE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM) ARTS™ constitutes a form of “remote control” operation that may be restricted to certain frequencies. 5. the alert beeps will be heard. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. you may choose the Beep mode which best suits your needs. Press the [F/W] key. ARTS™ Polling Time Options The ARTS™ feature may be programmed to poll every 25 seconds (default value) or 15 seconds. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. Press the [F/W] key. so as to alert you to the current status of ARTS™ operation. users should confirm the current status of §97. The choices are: INRANG: The beeps are issued only when the radio first confirms that you are within range. 66 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .S. 2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 3: AR INT. When you have made your selection.201(b) of the FCC’s rules governing the Amateur service before utilizing this feature on the 144 MHz band. you must look at the display to confirm current ARTS™ status. but does not re-confirm with beeps thereafter. 4. 3. The default value provides maximum battery conservation. 4. 3. ARTS™ Alert Beep Options The ARTS™ feature allows two kinds of alert beeps (with the additional option of turning them off). To change the polling interval: 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired ARTS™ Beep mode (see above). then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. To set the ARTS™ Beep mode. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. use the following procedure: 1.

Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 14: CW ID. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 67 . as many times as necessary. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. then press the PTT key to save the settings and exit to normal operation.7 above. The callsign field may contain up to 6 characters. If you mistake. 7. Repeat the previous step. 3. Note that the “slant bar” (– • • – •) is among the available characters. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key momentarily to display the previously stored callsign. the radio can be instructed to send “DE (your callsign) K” if this feature is enabled. 4. as discussed previously. Every ten minutes during ARTS™ operation.ARTS™ (AUTOMATIC RANGE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM) CW Identifier Setup The ARTS™ feature includes a CW identifier. repeat steps 1. Press and hold in the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key for 2 seconds to clear any previous callsign. Press and hold in the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key for 2 seconds to delete all data after the cursor that may have been previously stored erroneously. then re-enter the correct letter/number. Here’s how to program the CW Identifier: 1. 2. 10. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Item to “ON” (to enable the CW ID function). then press the [F/W] key. Press the [F/W] key. press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to back-space the cursor. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first letter/number of your callsign. 9. 11. then press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key momentarily to save the first letter/number and move on to the next character. When you have entered your entire callsign. to complete your callsign. To do this. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 5. 8. You may check your work by monitoring the entered callsign. should you be a “portable” station. 6. press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to confirm the callsign.

the latter parameter requires no research. 2. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.SET. After 10 minutes. then resume the display of the sensor inforBAROMETRIC PRESSURE ALTITUDE mation after five seconds. Also. 68 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 65: TEMP. 5. 4. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. To disable the display of sensor information. Press the [F/W] key. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to indicate the current temperature inside the transceivre’s case. the “8” and “9” segments of the Smeter will blink. If the pressure goes down. and that you know your current altitude. rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above. the display will change to show the frequency information. so that differences in pressure can be used to calculate altitude. 2. repeat the above procedure. the “4” and “5” segments of the S-meter will blink. When you operate the radio. This information is then used for calculation of your current altitude. 7. 3. If you are at sea level. BARO: Indicates the Barometric Pressure on the frequency area and relative changes in pressure on the S-meter area (requires optional SU-1). This procedure requires that you have a calculated barometer. 4. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 64: SU1. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to select the preferred unit (F (°F) or C (°C)). Press the [F/W] key. when the optional Barometric Pressure unit (SU-1) is installed. if the barometric pressure rises. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and display the sensor information five seconds after releasing the PTT switch. OFF: Disables display of the sensor information.SENSOR MODE The VX-6R can display the radio’s inside-the-case temperature. of course. ALTI: Indicates the Altitude (requires optional SU-1). 5. The Barometric Pressure unit requires calibration of the “offset” parameters. To display the Temperature 1. you get the unique capability of providing readout of the current barometric pressure. 3. To display the Sensor Information 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the sensor mode you wish to display. measured by internal sensors. 6. Press the PTT switch to exit to normal operation. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.

7. The Barometer and Altimeter will only track correctly in the short term. Rotate the DIAL knob to adjust the VX-6R display to the true altitude at your current location. if you calibrate the Barometer and altitude at the beginning of a day hike. 6. 4. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. That is. you will need to check the altitude correction again. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Selecting and Correcting the Altimeter 1. or Ft). then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 5. HG (mmHg). Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 63: SU1. Press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. But if the radio is not used for several weeks. 5. 6. 2. the altitude will be correctly measured during your hike. Press the [F/W] key.SENSOR MODE Selecting and Correcting the Atmospheric Pressure Meter 1.BRM. because pressure changes associated with changing weather may be mis-interpreted as a change in altitude. 7. 4. Rotate the DIAL knob to adjust the VX-6R display to the reading on your calibrated barometer. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to select the preferred units (M. 3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 62: SU1. 2. Press the [F/W] key momentarily to enable correction of the Altimeter. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to select the preferred units of measure (HP (hpa). VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 69 . then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.ALT. Press the [F/W] key. MB (mbar). 3. Press the [F/W] key momentarily to enable correction of the Atmospheric Pressure Meter. or IC (inches of Mercury)).

” “B. 70 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Rotate the DIAL knob while pressing the [0(SET)] key to select the access number (DTMF “0” ~ “9. This feature may also be used to access other systems.” “F (#). disable this function via step (4) above. as described below. With the Internet Connection feature activated (as in step 1 above).1 second) DTMF tone according to your selection in step 2. To disable the Internet Connection feature. If other users report that you always have a DTMF “beep” at the beginning of each transmission.INTERNET CONNECTION FEATURE The VX-6R can be used to access a “node” (repeater or base station) which is tied into the Vertex Standard WIRES™ (Wide-Coverage Internet Repeater Enhancement System) network.” “D. the VX-6R will generate a brief (0. This DTMF tone is sent at the beginning of every transmission to establish or maintain the link to the local WIRES™ node operating in the SRG mode. press the [ (LK)TXPO] key momentarily (the “ ” icon will disappear from the display).” “E ( ). 4. Details may be found at the WIRES-II Web site: http://www.” “A.com/en/wiresinfoen/. The “ ” icon will appear in the upper right corner of the display. 2.” “C. Press the [ (LK)TXPO] key momentarily to activate the Internet Connection feature. 3. SRG (“SISTER RADIO GROUP”) MODE 1. and you are not operating in conjunction with Internet access.”) corresponding to the WIRES™ node to which you wish to establish an Internet link (ask the node or repeater owner/operator if you don’t know the access number in the network). Now press the PTT switch to exit from the selection mode.vxstd.

numbers. 17. or symbols of the desired label. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 71 . then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. then re-enter the correct letter. Repeat the previous steps until you have completed the access code (“#(F)1101D”). 6. Press the PTT switch to save the setting and exit to normal operation. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to move to the next character. When you have programmed a label which is under 6 characters. For purposes of this example. A total of six characters may be used in the creation of a label. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key momentarily. 16. 14. Load the DTMF tones which you wish to use for Internet-link access into a Internet Memory register.SET. or symbol. 12. press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to back-space the cursor. Repeat steps 1 through 16 to store other access codes. 15. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key momentarily to accept the first digit and move to the second digit of the DTMF string. 13. 8. 18. Repeat steps 12 through 14 to program the remaining letters. 5. The first digit will blink. press the [0(SET)] key to confirm the label. if so desired. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Internet Memory register (F 0 ~ F63) into which you wish to store the access code. 3 Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 32: INT. we will use “#(F)1101D” as the access code (the “#” key is denoted by the letter “F”). 9. 4 Press the [0(SET)] key to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. number. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired label. 11.INTERNET CONNECTION FEATURE FRG (“FRIENDLY RADIO GROUP”) MODE You may access other Internet Link Systems (including WIRES™ in the “FRG” mode) that use a DTMF string for access. Press the [V/M(DW)MT] key momentarily to enable programming of the name tag. 10. proceed to the next step. 7. Rotate the DIAL knob to select “F” (representing DTMF “#”: the first digit of the DTMF string). 2 Press the [F/W] key. If you attach an alpha/numeric name “Tag” to the Internet Memory. Programming the FRG code 1. otherwise press and hold in the [0(SET)] key for one second to save the setting. If you make a mistake.

72 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . then press the PTT switch momentarily to lock in the selected access number. Once the Internet Connection feature is activated per step 7 above. Rotate the DIAL knob while pressing the [0(SET)] key to select the Internet Memory register number (F 0 ~ F63) corresponding to the Internet link repeater to which you wish to establish an Internet link. 5.5 above. 8. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. to send out the selected DTMF string (to establish the link to the desired Internetlink mode). repeat steps 1 . you may now press the [0(SET)] key. 4. Press the PTT switch to save the new settings. To return to the WIRES™ mode.INTERNET CONNECTION FEATURE FRG (“FRIENDLY RADIO GROUP”) MODE Operation (Accessing an FRG Node) 1. 6. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 30: INT MD. Press the [ (LK)TXPO] key momentarily to activate the Internet Connection feature. Press the [0(SET)] key to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “FRG” (thus activating the “Other Internet Link System” mode). 7. 2. selecting “SRG” in step 4. while you are transmitting. Press the [F/W] key. The “ ” icon will appear in the upper right corner of the display. 9. 3.

then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.F. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to save the setting. 10. Selectable entries are 0 . Here is the DTMF Autodial storage procedure: 1. press the desired numbers on the keypad. DTMF Autodialer Nine DTMF Autodial memories are provided. Press the [F/W] key. 7. 11. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the DTMF string. 4. with E and F representing DTMF “ ” and “#” tones respectively. release the PTT switch. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key momentarily to begin DTMF Memory entry into the selected register. [B]. and [D] tones often used for repeater control. repeater control. followed by the the [3(DTMF)] key.” 2. 6. plus the [A]. Press and hold in the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key for 2 seconds to delete all data after the cursor that may have been previously stored erroneously. or Internet-link access purposes. Manual DTMF Tone Generation You can generate DTMF tones during transmission manually. then re-select the correct number. allowing you to store telephone numbers for autopatch use. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have completed the telephone number. 2. 5. press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to move back to the previous digit. 1. You can also store short autopatch or Internet-link access code streams so as to avoid having to send them manually. and A . 4. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 73 . If you make a mistake. 3. 5. 9. Press the [3(DTMF)] key to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. While transmitting. the keypad includes the [ ] and [#] digits. Press the PTT switch to begin transmission. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the DTMF Memory register into which you wish to store this DTMF string. then rotate the DIAL knob to select “MANUAL. Press the [F/W] key. 3. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to accept the first digit and move to the next digit of the DTMF string. Besides numerical digits [0] through [9]. 8. [C].9.DTMF OPERATION The VX-6R’s 16-button keypad allows easy DTMF dialing for Autopatch. When you have sent all the digits desired. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 22: DT SET.

” 2. as the transmitter will be held “on the air” until the DTMF string is completed.DTMF OPERATION 12. 13. 4. To send the telephone number: 1. then press the numerical key ([1] through [9]) corresponding to the DTMF memory string you wish to send.4 above. using a different DTMF memory register. Once the string begins.11 above.” 74 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . first press the PTT switch. press the [F/W] key. repeat steps 1. press the PTT switch to save the settings and exit to normal operation You may check your work by monitoring the entered DTMF string. followed by the the [3(DTMF)] key. repeat steps 3. To disable the DTMF Autodialer. then rotate the DIAL knob to select “MANUAL. followed by the the [3(DTMF)] key. When all required DTMF memories are filled to your satisfaction. you may release the PTT switch. While the DTMF Autodialer is activated. Press the [F/W] key. Press the [3(DTMF)] key to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. then rotate the DIAL knob to select “AUTO. then press the [F/W] key. 3. To do this. If you store other numbers.

Continuously in group of five) 5. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to select the Trainig mode (displayed in fine print at the upper edge of the LCD): Trainig mode Morse Speed A: Sends five Alphabet charactors only A_r: Sends Alphabet charactors only (Repeatedly) n: Sends five Numeric charactors only n_r: Sends Numeric charactors only (Repeatedly) An: Sends five Alphabet. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Morse speed. Press the [F/W] key. so you can inprove your CW proficiency.” and “/” charactors TX/BUSY Indicator Status (Mixed) Anr: Send Alphabet. which stipulates five characters per word. 7. 8. 6. The “CPM” selection is based on the international “PARIS” standard. “?. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to switch the flashing of the LED (white) on and off.” and “/” charactors (Mixed. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 15: CWTRNG. To disable the CW Training feature.CW TRAINING FEATURE The VX-6R provides a CW Training feature. press the [F/W] key to send another code group. 2. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. Numeric. If one of the “r” modes is not selected in step 4 above. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. the transmitted characters will appear on the display. You may select the units of the code speed between “WPM (Words per minute)” and “CPM: characters per minute)” by pressing the [V/M(DW)MT] key. Press the [F/W] key to bigin generation of the code characters (CW sidetone only. a “dot” by the CW speed indicates that the LED is on. the radio does not transmit). 3. “?. which sends random Morse Code via the sidetone (heard in the speaker). VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 75 . 1. Numeric. 9. press the [0(SET)] key momentarily. Press the PTT switch to exit to normal operation. 4.

1) We recommend that you to write down the password number. rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key momentarily to display any previously-stored password. E (substitute for “ ”). B. 7. then press the PTT switch. then re-select the correct number/letter. When the password feature is activated. 76 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . If you wish to disable the Password feature. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. When you have finished entering the password.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS PASSWORD The VX-6R provides a password feature which can minimize the chance that your transceiver could be used by an unauthorized party. as well as all memories. A. Press the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key to move to the next digit. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. C. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first digit of the desired number/letter (0-9. repeat steps 1 . 11. and F (substitute for “#”). 4. the VX6R will clear the password. and will restore all other settings to factory defaults. 2. 10. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 47: PSWD. 8. 6. you may turn on the transceiver by performing the “Microprocessor Resetting” procedure (see page 85). If you make a mistake. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program the remaining numbers/letters of the desired password. Press the [F/W] key. the microprocessor will shut down the radio automatically. 9. However. use the following procedure: 1.4 above. D. You must enter the four digit password from the keypad. 2) If you forget the password number. press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to move back to the previous digit. To enter the password and activating this feature. and keep it in a safe place you can easily find if you forget your password. the radio will ask for the four digit password to be entered when the radio is first turned on. If the wrong password is entered. 3.

Press and hold in the [P(DMR)] key for one second to assign the Set Mode Item to the [P(DMR)] key. Now you can recall this preferred Set Mode Item by simply pressing the [P(DMR)] key momentarily. 500 ms. a user-selected Menu Item to the “primary” function of the [P(DMR)] key. The available selections are 200 ms. 4. When you are operating on Packet. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired “sleep” duration. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 1 second. the VX-6R will remain in the “active” mode. switch the Receive Battery Saver OFF. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. This feature significantly reduces quiescent battery drain. and you may change the amount of “sleep” time between activity checks using the Set Mode: 1. then resume its “sleep” cycles. causing your TNC not to receive the full data burst. periodically “waking it up” to check for activity. using the Set Mode. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 77 . which “puts the radio to sleep” for a time interval. To assign a preferred Set Mode Item to the [P(DMR)] key: 1. RECEIVE BATTERY SAVER SETUP An important feature of the VX-6R is its Receive Battery Saver. The default value is 200 ms. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Set Mode Item which you wish to assign to the key as a Menu short-cut.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS PROGRAMMING THE “P” KEY The VX-6R can assigne. 4. 2. as the sleep cycle may “collide” with the beginning of an incoming Packet transmission. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 53: RXSAVE. or OFF. Press the [F/W] key. 3. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 300 ms. When you have made your selection. 3. 5. If somebody is talking on the channel. Press the [F/W] key. 2. 2 seconds.

If a properlycoded signal is received on the EAI frequency. 78 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . the battery life will be reduced somewhat. You may observe a low-level “pop” noise while the Wakeup feature is polling. However. However. the radio also checks on the EAI frequency (Memory Channel “EAI”) for activity.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS WAKEUP FEATURE SETUP The Wakeup feature is similarly to the Receive Battery Saver. operates while the transceiver is turned off (“WAKEUP” will appear on the LCD). 6. the radio will turn itself on and then automatically transmit in accordance with the setting of Set Mode Item 18: EAI. 5. 5SEC/10SEC/20SEC/30SEC: Based on the selected time value. the radio will turn itself on fully. EAI: Checks the EAI frequency (Memory Channel “EAI”) every 5 seconds. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. just repeat the above procedure. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired “sleep” duration. and the “WAKEUP”notition will be been on the display. Press the [F/W] key. 2. If you wish to disable the Wakeup feature. rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step 4 above. When you have made your selection. 4. more advanced feature which conserves battery life by providing a longer “sleep” time than the regular Receive battery Saver. you may disable this popping by pressing the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] key in step 4 above (the “SAVE” notation will disappear). OFF: Disables the Wakeup feature. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. When the radio is turned off. If the EAI feature is activated when the radio was turned off. You may cancel the Wakeup feature temporarily by pressing the PWR switch while the Wakeup feature is engaged. The Wakeup feature. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 72: WAKEUP. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. the Wakeup feature will be engaged. it is a newer. If a signal is received on the frequency which is strong enough to open the Squelch. the radio will periodically check the operating frequency which it was on when the radio was turned off for activity. 3. once engaged. To set up the Wakeup feature: 1.

If you wish to disable the attenuator. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. When the attenuator is activated. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 5: ATT. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 70: TXSAVE. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON” (thus activating the Transmit Battery Saver). 6. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. the automatic selection of Low Power operation conserves battery drain significantly. 4.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS TX BATTERY SAVER The VX-6R also includes a useful Transmit Battery Saver. With the Transmit Battery Saver. When you have made your selection. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. 5. When you have made your selection. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Press the [F/W] key. the Operating Mode icon (AM. To activate the Transmit Battery Saver: 1. 4. ATT (FRONT END ATTENUATOR) The attenuator will reduce all signals (and noise) by 10 dB. or WFM) will blink on the display. FM. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON” (thus activating the attenuator). which will automatically lower the power output level when the last signal received was very strong. 1. 3. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. rotating the DIAL knob to select “OFF” in step “4” above. 2. For example. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 79 . when you are in the immediate vicinity of a repeater station. just repeat the above procedure. 5. Press the [F/W] key. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 3. and it may be used to make reception more pleasant under extremely crowded conditions. there generally is no reason to use the High Power output selection in order to achieve full-quieting access to the repeater. 2.

4.5/1/3/5/8 hours. When the APO is activated. just repeat the above procedure. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. 6. 5. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. 3. 2. the microprocessor will shut down the radio automatically. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. Press the [F/W] key. Use the following procedure: 1. The default condition for the APO is OFF. AUTOMATIC POWER-OFF (APO) FEATURE The APO feature helps conserve battery life by automatically turning the radio off after a user-defined period of time within which there has been no dial or key activity.LED. rotating the DIAL knob to select “ON” in step 4 above. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 3.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS DISABLING THE TX/BUSY INDICATOR Further battery conservation may be accomplished by disabling the BUSY indicator which appears while the VX-6R is receiving a signal. 80 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 11: BSY. 5. If you wish to re-enable the BUSY Indicator. When you have made your selection. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the desired time period after which the radio will automatically shut down. and here is the procedure for activating it: 1. as well as APO Off. The available selections for the time before power-off are 0. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. to turn the radio back on after an APO shutdown. the “ ” icon will appear at the upper right corner on the LCD. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 1: APO. as usual. When you have made your selection. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “OFF” (thus disabling the BUSY indicator). 4. 2. Press and hold in the PWR switch for one second. Press the [F/W] key. If there is no action by you within the time interval programmed.

Rotate the DIAL knob to set the desired time priod after which the radio will automatically turn on. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 81 . 5. 4. 2. The Automatic Power-On feature will be ignored when the Wakeup feature is activated. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. 1. 3. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 41: ON TMR. When you have made your selection. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. this activates the Automatic Power-On feature.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS AUTOMATIC POWER-ON FEATURE The VX-6R also includes the capability to turn itself on after a programmed time interval. a count-down timer in the display will show the time remaining until automatic switch-on. You may cancel the Automatic Power-On feature (to turn off the radio) by pressing and holding the PWR switch for one second while the Automatic Power-On feature is engaged. Press the [F/W] key. Note that this is not the time of day when the radio will turn on. it is the numbaer of hours and minutes until the radio turns on. When the radio is turned off.

3. 2. if you have DCS or TSQ engaged. 5. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON” (thus activating the BCLO feature). then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. Press the [F/W] key. and here is how to change that setting: 1. BCLO prevents you from disrupting their communications accidentally (because your radio may be muted by its own Tone Decoder). Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 6: BCLO. When you have made your selection. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. BCLO will inhibit transmission if a station is on frequency but not transmitting the proper tone. BCLO will thus prevent you from interfering with the other station's transmission. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. 82 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Remember that BCLO is controlled by the Noise Squelch. The default setting for the BCLO is OFF. 4. On a frequency where stations using different CTCSS or DCS codes may be active.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS BUSY CHANNEL LOCK-OUT (BCLO) The BCLO feature prevents the radio’s transmitter from being activated if a signal strong enough to break through the “noise” squelch is present.

” In this configuration (HALF DEVIATION active).5/5/10 minutes). the transmitter’s deviation will be approximately ±2. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 27: HLF. 2. too! CHANGING THE TX DEVIATION LEVEL In many areas of the world. or OFF. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. 5. The “normal” setting for the deviation (when this Set Mode Item is set to “OFF”) is ±5 kHz. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 83 . press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. 2. This will significantly improve battery life. 5. The VX-6R includes a simple method of accomplishing this: 1. Rotate the DIAL knob to set the Time-Out Timer to the desired “Maximum TX” time (2. Press the [F/W] key. Rotate the DIAL knob to select Set Mode Item 67: TOT. Press the [F/W] key. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. This will promote battery conservation by not allowing you to make excessively-long transmissions. 4. it often is required that operators use reduced deviation levels. When you have made your selection. When you have made your selection. 3. As configured at the factory the TOT feature is set to 3 minutes. and here is the procedure for activating it: 1.MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS TRANSMITTER TIME-OUT TIMER (TOT) The TOT feature provides a safety switch which limits transmission time to a pre-programmed value. for easier listening on the narrow signal. In such operating environments. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode.5 kHz. 3. channel congestion has required that operating channels be closely spaced. press the PTT switch to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. and in the event of a stuck PTT switch (perhaps if the radio or a Speaker/Mic is wedged between car seats) it can prevent interference to other users as well as battery depletion. Rotate the DIAL knob to set this Set Mode Item to “ON. 1) When your transmission time is within 10 seconds of the Time-Out Timer expiration.DEV. an Alert bell will provide an audible warning from the speaker. 4. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of this Set Mode Item. and the received audio output level will be increased. 2) Since brief transmissions are the mark of a good operator. try setting up your radio’s TOT feature for a maximum transmission time of one minute. so as to reduce the potential for interference to users on adjacent channels.

MISCELLANEOUS SETTINGS NOTE 84 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .

Turn the radio off. it is possible that data on the microprocessor may have become corrupted. 3. [0(SET)]. Press and hold in the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP]. Press the [F/W] key momentarily to reset the Set (Menu) mode settings to their factory defaults (press any other key to cancel the Reset procedure). Here’s how to do this: MICROPROCESSOR RESETTING To clear all memories and all other settings to factory defaults: 1.RESET PROCEDURES In the event of erratic operation of the transceiver. 2. and [V/M(DW)MT] keys while turning the radio on. Press and hold in the [MODE(SP S)SQ TYP] and [V/M(DW)MT] keys while turning the radio on. the only path to recovery may involve resetting of the microprocessor. Press the [F/W] key momentarily to reset all settings to their factory defaults (press any other key to cancel the Reset procedure). 3. SET MODE RESETTING To reset the Set Mode Item settings to their factory defaults: 1. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 85 . Turn the radio off. While this is a highly unusual situation. 2.

and begin normal operation. Press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key on the Source radio. If the data transfer is successful.. “. 4.. press the [ V/M ( DW ) MT ] key (“-. 86 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . “ERROR” will be displayed.. “CLONE” will reappear on the Source radio and the Destination radio will return to the normal operation. 5. Turn both radios off and disconnect the cloning cable. Do this for both radios (the order of switch-on does not matter).. 2. and the data from this radio will be transferred to the other radio. 3. Connect the user-constructed cloning cable and two optional CT-91 Microphone Adapters (one on each end) between the MIC/SP jacks of the two radios.WAIT -.” will appear on the Source radio.CLONING The VX-6R includes a convenient “Clone” feature. This can be particularly useful when configuring a number of transceivers for a public service operation... Check your cable connections and battery voltage. 7. The “CLONE” notation will appear on the displays of both radios. which allows the memory and configuration data from one transceiver to be transferred to another VX-6R. If there is a problem during the cloning process. Turn both radios off.” will appear on the LCD). 6. On the Destination radio.TX . and try again. Press and hold in the [F/W] key while turning the radios on. Here is the procedure for Cloning one radio’s data to another: 1. You can then turn the Source radio back on.

some of which have not been detailed previously. the primary (press key) function of the [ (LK)TXPO] key is set to activating the Internet Connection feature. 1. “MY KEY” will appear on the display. and before exiting to normal operation. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the Set Mode Item to be adjusted. After completing your selection and adjustment. 4. “MY MENU” Short-cut Key Setup In the factory default. Press the [F/W] key. a momentary press of the [ (LK)TXPO] key will immediately recall the selected Menu item. 3. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 87 . you may change the primary (press key) function of the [ (LK)TXPO] key to a short-cut path for recall of one of Set Mode Items. It may be used for configuration of a wide variety of transceiver parameters. Rotate the DIAL knob to adjust or select the parameter to be changed on the Set Mode Item selected in above step. then press the [0(SET)] key to enter the Set mode. already described in parts of many previous chapters. is easy to activate and set. You must press the [ (LK)TXPO] key again to exit to normal operation. Press and hold in the [ (LK)TXPO] key for one second to assign the Set Mode Item to the [ (LK)TXPO] key. Press and hold in the [ (LK)TXPO] key while turning the radio on. 2. Now.SET (MENU) MODE The VX-6R Set Mode. 4. Recall the Set Mode Item which you wish to assign to the [ (LK)TXPO] key as a Menu short-cut. to confirm that the command was executed. However. 3. Some Set Mode Items (like Set Mode Item 50: TN FRQ) require that the [0(SET)] key be pressed after setting of the parameter. This procedure switches the [ (LK)TXPO] key between the “Internet Connection” function and the “MY MENU” key function. 2. Use the following procedure to activate the Set Mode: 1. press the PTT switch momentarily to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to enable adjustment of the Set Mode Item. 5.

50M (CON. Enables/Disables the BUSY LED while the Squelch is open.DEV] 28 [HM/RV] 29 [INT CD] 30 [INT MD] 31 [INT.SET] 33 [LAMP] 34 [LED LT] 35 [LOCK] 36 [M/T-CL] 37 [MCGAIN] 38 [MW MD] 39 [NAME] Enables/Disables the Band-edge beeper while selecting the frequency via the DIAL knob.40M / INT.10M / CON. Enables/Disables the Automatic Repeater Shift function.40M / CON.15M / CON. Selects the Polling Interval during ARTS operation. Enables/Disables over-written the Direct Memory Recall Channel while operating on the Direct Memory Recall Channel.DTMF F SRG / FRG MANUAL / AUTO --KEY / CONT / OFF --KEY / DIAL / K+D / PTT / P+K / P+D / ALL MONI / T-CALL 1 LVL 1 . Selects the Internet Link Connection mode. 1: Depends on the transceiver version. Shifting of the CPU clock frequency.LVL 9 (LVL 5) --ON / OFF ±5 MHz / ±10 MHz / ±50 MHz / ±100 MHz OFF / ON --OFF / 4WPM-13WPM / 15WPM / 17WPM / 20WPM / 24WPM / 30WPM / 40WPM (20CPM-65CPM (5CPM multiples) / 75CPM / 85CPM / 100CPM / 120CPM / 150CPM / 200CPM) --104 standard DCS codes (023) DISABLE / ENABLE LVL 0 .10M / INT. Enables/Disables the keypad beeper. AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT: BOLD ITARIC) OFF / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 3HOUR / 5HOUR / 8HOUR IN RNG / ALWAYS / OFF 25 SEC / 15 SEC ON / OFF OFF / ON OFF / ON ON / OFF OFF / 1 / 3 / 5 / 8 / CONT (Continuous ringing) LVL 1 .TMR] Indicates the DC Supply Voltage. Enables/Disables the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature. 25 [EDG. Enables/Disables “Inverted” DCS code decoding.30M / CON. Selects the memory register for an Access Number (DTMF code) for non-WIRES™ Internet Link System access. Enables/Disables the Busy Channel Lock-Out feature.A/M] 32 [INT.WRT] 21 [DT A/M] 22 [DT SET] 23 [EAI] 24 [EAI. Setting of the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) operating mode and its Transmit Time.20M / INT.SET (MENU) MODE S ET M ODE I TEM FUNCTION 1 [APO] 2 [AR BEP] 3 [AR INT] 4 [ARS] 5 [ATT] 6 [BCLO] 7 [BEEP] 8 [BELL] 9 [BP LVL] 10 [BNK NM] 11 [BSY. Setting of the Display brightness level. Toggles the display indication between “frequency” and the channel’s “Alpha/Numeric Tag. Enables/Disables the CW Training feature and selects the sending speed of the Morse Code. Reducing the Deviation level by 50 %. Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory Group. Selects the number of CTCSS/DCS Bell ringer repetitions. Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodial feature. Selects the MONI switch (just below the PTT switch) function. Selects the Access Number (DTMF digit) for WIRESTM operation. Adjust the microphone gain level. Selects the LCD/Keypad Lamp mode. 50M CON.15M / INT. Selects the Beep option during ARTS operation. 1M through INT.LED] 12 [CH CNT] 13 [CLK. 1M through CON. Adjust the Beep volume level. 88 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Setting of the DCS code. Selects the alarm(s) utilized when the Emergency function is engaged.20M / CON. Selects the Control Locking lockout combination.BEP] 26 [EMG S] 27 [HLF. Programs and activates the CW Identifier (used during ARTS operation).” 40 [NM SET] Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory channels. Enables/Disables DTMF Autodialer feature while operating on the Internet Connection feature. Illuminates the STROBE glows continuously in white. Selects the method of selection of channels for Memory Storage.30M / INT. Programming of the DTMF Autodialer.SFT] 14 [CW ID] 15 [CWTRNG] Setting of the Automatic Power-Off feature.5M) OFF / ON BP+STR / BEAM / BP+BEM / CW / BP+CW / BEEP / STROBE OFF / ON REV / HOME DTMF 1 . Selects the Channel Counter Search Width. Selects the Primary function of the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key.LVL 9 (LVL 5) NEXT / LOWER FREQ / ALPHA -- 16 [DC VLT] 17 [DCS CD] 18 [DCS RV] 19 [DIMMER] 20 [DMR. Enables/Disables the Receiver Front-end (10 dB) Attenuator.LVL 12 (LVL 7) MANUAL / AUTO OFF / ON --OFF / ON INT.

Selects the receiving mode.0k / AUTO M / Ft 1. Selects the Receive-mode Battery Saver interval (“sleep” ratio) Selects the Smart Search Sweep mode. Selects the measurement units for the altimeter.LMP] 56 [SHIFT] 57 [SKIP] 58 [SPLIT] 59 [SQL] 60 [SQL.0k / 12. Selects the Tone Encoder and/or Decoder mode. Select the time delay between when the PTT switch is pressed and the carrier is transmitted.0k / 20. Enables/disables the Answer Back function of the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch. Selects the Scan Resume mode. Selects the display of the sensor units’ information.00 . and correcting the altimeter. Selects the Memory Scan “Skip” channel-selection mode.5k / 15.+1000 OFF / BARO / ALTI 3 -- 42 [OPN. 3 Offset: –1000 . Setting of the synthesizer steps. Indicates indicate the current temperature inside the transceivre’s case and selects the measurement units (“°F” or “°C”) for the temperature sensor.149.LVL 8 (Wide FM: LVL 2) OFF / TONE / T SQL / DCS / RV TN 5. Enables/Disables the Transmitter Battery Saver.ALT] 63 [SU1. Selects the Tone Serch Scanner speed. Enables or disables the VFO band edge limiting for the current band. AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT: BOLD ITARIC) OFF / 00H10M (00:10) . 2: Depends on the frequency band.BRM] 64 [SU1. 3 Offset: –1000 .0k / 10.+1000 HP / MB / HG / IC 1. Programs and activates the Password feature.MSG] 43 [PAGER] 44 [PAG. 3: Requires optional SU-1.SET (MENU) MODE S ET M ODE I TEM FUNCTION 41 [ON TMR] Set the ON Timer time. Adjusts the RF Squelch threshold level.0k / 50.SET] 65 [TEMP] Selects the Opening Message that appears when the radio is powered on.CDR] 46 [PAG. Enables/Disables the Scan lamp while paused.0k / 25. Setting of the Wakeup feature. Selects the measurement units for the Barometric Pressure.TYP] 61 [STEP] 62 [SU1. Setting of the CTCSS Tone Frequency. Enables/Disables the Weather Alert Scan feature.LVL 15 (Narrow FM: LVL 1). Setting of the TOT time.24H00M (24:00) (10 minutes multiples) DC / MSG / OFF OFF / ON OFF / ON (05_47) (05_47) -OFF / 20MS / 50MS / 100MS / 200MS 3 SEC / 5 SEC / 10 SEC / BUSY / HOLD OFF / S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / S5 / S6 / S7 / S8 / S9 / S9+ SIMP / –RPT / +RPT AUTO / N-FM / AM / W-FM 200 MS / 300 MS / 500 MS / 1 S / 2 S / OFF SINGLE / CONT ON / OFF 0. Enables/Disables split CTCSS/DCS coding. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 89 . and correcting the Barometric Pressure. Sets the Squelch threshold level.CDT] 47 [PSWD] 48 [PTT. Sets the magnitude of the repeater Shift.ABK] 45 [PAG. Sets the Repeater Shift Direction.0k / 100.0 .95 MHz 2 (50 kHz increments) OFF / SKIP / ONLY OFF / ON LVL 0 . Enables/disables the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch function. Enables/Disables the receiver audio output during the Tone Serch Scanner is activated.0 . Setting the Transmitting Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch. LVL 0 . 66 [TN FRQ] 67 [TOT] 68 [TS MUT] 69 [TS SPD] 70 [TXSAVE] 71 [VFO MD] 72 [WAKEUP] 73 [WX ALT] 50 standard CTCSS tones (100 Hz) OFF / 1MIN / 3MIN / 5MIN / 10MIN ON / OFF FAST / LOW OFF / ON BAND / ALL OFF / 5S / 10S / 20S / 30S / EAI OFF / ON 1: Depends on the transceiver version.DLY] 49 [RESUME] 50 [RF SQL] 51 [RPT] 52 [RX MD] 53 [RXSAVE] 54 [S SRCH] 55 [SCN. Setting the Receiver Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch.

CON. INT. Enables/Disables the Scan lamp while paused.149.DTMF F SRG / FRG MANUAL / AUTO -OFF / ON INT.30M.LVL 15 (NFM: LVL 1).40M. Selects the Polling Interval during ARTS operation.LMP] 57 [SKIP] 73 [WX ALT] 68 [TS MUT] 69 [TS SPD] 53 [RXSAVE] 70 [TXSAVE] 72 [WAKEUP] 29 [INT CD] 30 [INT MD] 31 [INT. 50M (CON. 26 [EMG S] EPCS SETTING Enables/disables the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch function. Selects the Internet Link Connection mode. Sets the Squelch threshold level. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) 4 [ARS] 51 [RPT] 56 [SHIFT] 8 [BELL] 17 [DCS CD] 18 [DCS RV] 21 [DT A/M] 22 [DT SET] 59 [SQL] 60 [SQL.10M. and CON. 1M through CON.15M.WRT] 38 [MW MD] 39 [NAME] 40 [NM SET] 49 [RESUME] 55 [SCN. Sets the Repeater Shift Direction. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) WIRESTM SETTING SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) EAI SETTING Enables/Disables the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature. Enables/Disables the Weather Alert Scan feature.20M. Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodial feature.TYP] 66 [TN FRQ] 2 [AR BEP] 3 [AR INT] 14 [CW ID] 10 [BNK NM] 20 [DMR. 1: Depends on the frequency band." Stores Alpha-Numeric "Tags" for the Memory channels. Selects the memory register for an Access Number (DTMF code) for non-WIRESTM Internet Link System access.TMR] ON / OFF SIMP / –RPT / +RPT 0.10M. CON. CON. INT. Enables/Disables DTMF Autodialer feature while operating on the Internet Connection feature.95 MHz 1 OFF / 1 / 3 / 5 / 8 / CONT (Continuous ringing) 104 standard DCS codes (023) DISABLE / ENABLE OFF / ON --LVL 0 . Selects the Tone Serch Scanner speed.CDR] 46 [PAG.LVL 8 (WFM: LVL 2) OFF / TONE / T SQL / DCS / RV TN 50 standard CTCSS tones (100 Hz) IN RNG / ALWAYS / OFF 25 SEC / 15 SEC --MANUAL / AUTO NEXT / LOWER FREQ / ALPHA -BUSY / HOLD / TIME ON / OFF OFF / SKIP / ONLY OFF / ON OFF / ON FAST / SLOW 200 MS / 300 MS / 500 MS / 1 S / 2 S / OFF OFF / ON OFF / 5S / 10S / 20S / 30S / EAI DTMF 1 .SET] 23 [EAI] 24 [EAI.20M. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) POWER SAVING SETTING Selects the Receive-mode Battery Saver interval. Selects the method of selection of channels for Memory Storage. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) 43 [PAGER] 44 [PAG. Enables/Disables the receiver audio output during the Tone Serch Scanner is activated.ABK] 45 [PAG. Selects the Access Number (DTMF digit) for WIRESTM operation. INT. Programs and activates the CW Identifier. CON.30M. 1M through INT.40M. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) ARTS SETTING Selects the Beep option during ARTS operation. Toggles the display indication between “Frequency” and the channel's "Alpha/Numeric Tag. Setting of the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) operating mode and its Transmit Time. CON. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) SCAN SETTING Selects the Scan Resume mode. LVL 0 . Setting of the CTCSS Tone Frequency. Setting the Transmitting Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch. INT. Enables/Disables "Inverted" DCS code decoding. Selects the Tone Encoder and/or Decoder mode. 50M. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) MEMORY SETTING Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory Group. Setting of the DCS code.00 .A/M] 32 [INT. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) Selects the alarm(s) utilized when the Emergency function is engaged.15M) BP+STR / BEAM / BP+BEM / CW / BP+CW / BEEP / STROBE OFF / ON OFF / ON (05_47) (05_47) CTCSS/DCS SETTING Selects the number of CTCSS/DCS Bell ringer repetitions. Selects the Memory Scan “Skip•Echannel-selection mode. Programming of the DTMF Autodialer. Setting of the Wakeup feature. Enables/disables the Answer Back function of the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch. Setting the Receiver Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch.15M.SET (MENU) MODE REPEATER SETTING Enables/Disables the Automatic Repeater Shift function. Sets the magnitude of the repeater Shift.CDT] 90 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Enables/Disables the Transmitter Battery Saver. INT. Enables/Disables over-written the Direct Memory Recall Channel while operating on the Direct Memory Recall Channel.

1: Depends on the frequency band. Setting of the TOT time Enables or disables the VFO band edge limiting for the current band. and correcting the altimeter.SET] DISPLAY SETTING SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) Indicates the DC Supply Voltage 16 [DC VLT] Setting of the Display brightness level. Selects the display of the sensor units’ information.65CPM (5CPM multiples) / 75CPM / 85CPM /100CPM / 120CPM / 150CPM / 200CPM) OFF / ON OFF / ON --LVL 1 . 3: Requires optional SU-1. 19 [DIMMER] Indicates indicate the current temperature inside the transceivre’s case and selects the mea. 64 [SU1. Illuminates the STROBE glows continuously in white. Select the time delay between when the PTT switch is pressed and the carrier is transmitted. Selects the Channel Counter Search Width. Enables/Disables split CTCSS/DCS coding. Adjust the microphone gain level. Enables/Disables the BUSY LED while the Squelch is open. 25 [EDG.0k / 50. Selects the LCD/Keypad Lamp mode.0k / AUTO OFF / 1MIN / 3MIN / 5MIN / 10MIN BAND / ALL Enables/Disables the Band-edge beeper while selecting the frequency via the DIAL knob.DLY] 50 [RF SQL] 52 [RX MD] 54 [S SRCH] 58 [SPLIT] 61 [STEP] 67 [TOT] 71 [VFO MD] VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 91 .24H00M (24:00) (10 minutes multiples) DC / MSG / OFF -OFF / 20MS / 50MS / 100MS / 200MS OFF / S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / S5 / S6 / S7 / S8 / S9 / S9+ AUTO / N-FM / AM / W-FM SINGLE / CONT OFF / ON 5. Selects the Control Locking lockout combination. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) 7 [BEEP] 9 [BP LVL] 11 [BSY.LED] 28 [HM/RV] 33 [LAMP] 35 [LOCK] 36 [M/T-CL] 62 [SU1.0k / 20. Setting of the synthesizer steps. Selects the Smart Search Sweep mode.0k / 12. 2: Depends on the transceiver version.ALT] ON / OFF LVL 1 .MSG] 47 [PSWD] 48 [PTT. Enables/Disables the Receiver Front-end (10 dB) Attenuator.+1000 HP / MB / HG / IC 2.65 [TEMP] surement units (“°F” or “°C”) for the temperature sensor.+1000 OFF / BARO / ALTI 3 -LVL 0 .LVL 9 (LVL 5) ON / OFF REV / HOME KEY / CONT / OFF KEY / DIAL / K+D / PTT / P+K / P+D / ALL MONI / T-CALL 2 M / Ft 2. 42 [OPN.DEV] 34 [LED LT] 37 [MCGAIN] 41 [ON TMR] Selects the Opening Message that appears when the radio is powered on.BRM] Pressure. Adjust the Beep volume level. Shifting of the CPU clock frequency. MISCELLANEOUS SETTING Setting of the Automatic Power-Off feature.LVL 10 (LVL 5) OFF / 00H10M (00:10) .SET (MENU) MODE SWITCH/KNOB SETTING Enables/Disables the keypad beeper.SFT] 15 [CWTRNG] OFF / 30MIN / 1HOUR / 3HOUR / 5HOUR / 8HOUR OFF / ON OFF / ON ±5 MHz / ±10 MHz / ±50 MHz / ±100 MHz OFF / ON OFF / 4WPM-13WPM / 15WPM / 17WPM / 20WPM / 24WPM / 30WPM / 40WPM (20CPM .0k / 100.BEP] 27 [HLF. Selects the Primary function of the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key.5k / 15.0k / 10. Set the ON Timer time.0k / 25. and correcting the Barometric 63 [SU1. Reducing the Deviation level by 50 %. 3 Offset: –1000 . Selects the receiving mode. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) Selects the measurement units for the Barometric Pressure.0 . Selects the MONI switch (just below the PTT switch) function.0 . Programs and activates the Password feature. Adjusts the RF Squelch threshold level. Enables/Disables the Busy Channel Lock-Out feature. 3 Offset: –1000 . Enables/Disables the CW Training feature and selects the sending speed of the Morse Code.LVL 12 (LVL 7) -- SU-1 SETTING Selects the measurement units for the altimeter. SET MODE ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES (DEFAULT) 1 [APO] 5 [ATT] 6 [BCLO] 12 [CH CNT] 13 [CLK.

Available Values: 25 SEC/15 SEC Default: 25SEC Set Mode Item 4 [ARS] Function: Enables/Disables the Automatic Repeater Shift function.OFF Default: ARS. ON/ARS. Available Values: OFF/1/3/5/8/CONT (Continuous ringing) Default: OFF 92 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Available Values: ARS. Set Mode Item 3 [AR INT] Function: Selects the Polling Interval during ARTS operation. Available Values: INRANG/ALWAYS/OFF Default: INRANG INRANG: Beeps sound only when the radio first detects that you are within range. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 6 [BCLO] Function: Enables/Disables the Busy Channel Lock-Out feature. ON Set Mode Item 5 [ATT] Function: Enables/Disables the Receiver Front-end (10 dB) Attenuator. OFF: No alert beeps sound. Available Values: ON/OFF Default: ON Set Mode Item 8 [BELL] Function: Selects the number of CTCSS/DCS Bell ringer repetitions. Available Values: OFF/30MIN/1HOUR/3HOUR/5HOUR/8HOUR Default: OFF Set Mode Item 2 [AR BEP] Function: Selects the Beep option during ARTS operation. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 7 [BEEP] Function: Enables/Disables the keypad beeper. ALWAYS: Beeps sound every time a polling transmission is received from the other station (every 15 or 25 seconds when in range).SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 1 [APO] Function: Setting of the Automatic Power-Off feature.

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 93 . Available Values: LVL 1 .LED] Function: Enables/Disables the BUSY LED while the Squelch is open. Set Mode Item 14 [CW ID] Function: Programs and activates the CW Identifier (used during ARTS operation). See page ?? for details. Set Mode Item 11 [BSY. Set Mode Item 16 [DC VLT] Function: Indicates the DC Supply Voltage.LVL 10 Default: LVL 5 Set Mode Item 10 [BNK NM] Function: Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory Group. Available Values: OFF/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/15/17/20/24/30/40 WPM or OFF/20/25/30/35/40/45/50/55/60/65/75/85/100/120/150/200 CPM Default: OFF Note: To switch units between “WPM” and “CPM.” just press the [V/M(DW)MT] key. Available Values: ON/OFF Default: ON Set Mode Item 12 [CH CNT] Function: Selects the Channel Counter Search Width. Available Values: ±5 MHz/±10 MHz/±50 MHz/±100 MHz Default: ±5 MHz Set Mode Item 13 [CLK.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 9 [BP LVL] Function: Adjust the Beep volume level. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF This function is only used to move a spurious response “birdie. Set Mode Item 15 [CWTRNG] Function: Enables/Disables the CW Training feature and selects the sending speed of the Morse Code chanacter groups.SFT] Function: Shifting of the CPU clock frequency. See page ?? for details.” should it fall on a desired frequency.

Available Values: ON/OFF Default: ON Set Mode Item 21 [DT A/M] Function: Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodial feature. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 24 [EAI. 5M 94 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . 1M through INT. CON.15M.10M. CON. Available Values: INT.40M. and CON. INT.15M. Available Values: 104 standard DCS codes Default: DCS. INT.10M.20M. 1M through CON.30M. INT.20M.023 Set Mode Item 18 [DCS RV] Function: Enables/Disables “Inverted” DCS code decoding.30M. Available Values: LVL 0 . CON. INT. 50M.TMR] Function: Setting of the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) operating mode and its Transmit Time. 50M Default: CON.WRT] Function: Enables/Disables over-writing of the Direct Memory Recall Channels while operating on a Direct Memory Recall Channel. Set Mode Item 23 [EAI] Function: Enables/Disables the Emergency Automatic ID (EAI) Feature.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 17 [DCS CD] Function: Setting of the DCS code.LVL 12 Default: LVL 12 Set Mode Item 20 [DMR. Available Values: MANUAL/AUTO Default: MANUAL Set Mode Item 22 [DT SET] Function: Programming of the DTMF Autodialer. INT. See page 73 for details. CON. Available Values: DISABLE/ENABLE Default: DISABLE 023 054 125 165 245 274 356 445 506 627 732 025 065 131 172 246 306 364 446 516 631 734 026 071 132 174 251 311 365 452 523 632 743 DCS CODE 031 032 036 043 072 073 074 114 134 143 145 152 205 212 223 225 252 255 261 263 315 325 331 332 371 411 412 413 454 455 462 464 526 532 546 565 654 662 664 703 754 – – – 047 115 155 226 265 343 423 465 606 712 – 051 116 156 243 266 346 431 466 612 723 – 053 122 162 244 271 351 432 503 624 731 – Set Mode Item 19 [DIMMER] Function: Setting of the Display brightness level. CON.40M.

Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 28 [HM/RV] Function: Selects the Primary function of the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key. CW: Transmits the Morse Code “SOS” (• • • – – – • • •) message on the air beginning one minute after activation of the Emergency function.DTMF F Default: DTMF 1 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 95 . Set Mode Item 27 [HLF. STROBE: The TX/BUSY indicator lamp flashes. Available Values: REV/HOME Default: REV REV: Pressing the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key reverses the transmit and receive frequencies during repeater operation. BP+CW: Loud “Alarm” sounds and the Morse Code “SOS” (• • • – – – • • •) message is transmitted on the air beginning one minute after activation of the Emergency function.DEV] Function: Reducing the Deviation level by 50 %.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 25 [EDG. BEAM: The TX/BUSY indicator glows continuously in white. Set Mode Item 29 [INT CD] Function: Selects the Access Number (DTMF digit) for WIRESTM operation. BEEP: Loud “Alarm” sounds. HOME: Pressing the [HM/RV(EMG)R/H] key instantly recalls a favorite “Home” channel. BP+BEM: Loud “Alarm” sounds and the TX/BUSY indicator glows continuously in white. When the radio is set to the CW or BP+CW mode.BEP] Function: Enables/Disables the Band-edge Beeper while selecting the frequency via the DIAL knob. the radio will be instructed to send “DE (your callsign)” after the sending of the SOS message. Available Values: BP+STR/BEAM/BP+BEM/CW/BP+CW/BEEP/STROBE Default: BP+STR BP+STR: Loud “Alarm” sounds and the TX/BUSY indicator flashes. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 26 [EMG S] Function: Selects the alarm(s) utilized when the Emergency function is engaged. if your callsign is entered via Set Mode Item 14: CW ID. Available Values: DTMF 1 .

Available Values: MONI/T-CALL Default: MONI MONI: Pressing the MONI switch causes the Noise/Tone Squelch to be over-ridden.” Set Mode Item 36 [M/T-CL] Function: Selects the MONI switch (just below the PTT switch) function. used for repeater access in many countries (especially in Europe). Available Values: F 0 .” and “P” = “PTT.A/M] Function: Enables/Disables the DTMF Autodialer feature while operating using the Internet Connection feature.SET] Function: Selects the memory register for an Access Number (DTMF code) for nonWIRES™ Internet Link System access.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 30 [INT MD] Function: Selects the Internet Link Connection mode. allowing you to listen for weak (or non-encoded) signals. 96 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Available Values: KEY/DIAL/K+D/PTT/P+K/P+D/ALL Default: K+D Note: “K” = “Key.” “D” = “Dial. T-CALL: Pressing the MONI switch activates a 1750-Hz burst tone. CONT: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD continuously. OFF: Disables the Keypad/LCD lamp illumination.F63 Default: F 1 Set Mode Item 33 [LAMP] Function: Selects the LCD/Keypad Lamp mode. Available Values: KEY/CONT/OFF Default: KEY KEY: Illuminates the Keypad/LCD for five seconds when you rotate the DIAL knob or press any key or switch (except the PTT switch). Available Values: SRG/FRG Default: SRG (Single DTMF Digit is appended at the beginning of each transmission) Set Mode Item 31 [INT. Set Mode Item 35 [LOCK] Function: Selects the Control Locking lockout combination. Available Values: ON/OFF Default: OFF Set Mode Item 32 [INT. Set Mode Item 34 [LED LT] Function: Illuminates the STROBE glows continuously in white (useful as emergency flashlight at night).

LVL 10 Default: LVL 5 Set Mode Item 38 [MW MD] Function: Selects the method of selection of channels for Memory Storage. Set Mode Item 41 [ON TMR] Function: Set the ON Timer time. LOWER: Stores the data into the lowest-available “free” channel. See page 35 for details.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 37 [MCGAIN] Function: Adjust the microphone gain level. Available Values: LVL 1 . Available Values: NEXT/LOWER Default: NEXT NEXT: Stores the data into the memory channel which is next-highest from the laststored memory channel.” Available Values: FREQ/ALPHA Default: FREQ Set Mode Item 40 [NM SET] Function: Stores Alpha-Numeric “Tags” for the Memory channels. Set Mode Item 39 [NAME] Function: Toggles the display indication between “frequency” and the channel’s “Alpha/ Numeric Tag. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 97 . Available Values: OFF/00H10M (00:10) .24H00M (24:00) (10 minutes multiples) Default: OFF The ON Timer turns on the radio at the programmed time.

98 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL . Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 44 [PAG. See page 60 for details. If you make a mistake. Available Values: DC/MSG/OFF Default: DC DC: DC supply voltage MSG: Set by user. then press the [MODE(SPS)SQ TYP] key momentarily to save the first letter/number and move on to the next character. Set Mode Item 43 [PAGER] Function: Enables/disables the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch function. press the [BAND(SCN)BND DN] key to back-space the cursor. Press the [MODE(SPS)SQ TYP] key momentarily to enable programming of the opening message. See page 60 for details. Set this Set Mode Item to “MSG. 4.CDT] Function: Setting the Transmitting Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch.” 2. now re-enter the correct letter/number. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 45 [PAG. Repeat the previous step as necessary to complete the message (up to six characters).MSG] Function: Selects the Opening Message that appears when the radio is powered on. You will notice the first character entry’s location blinking. See below.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 42 [OPN. Rotate the DIAL knob to select the first letter/number of the message. When you have entered the desired opening message.CDR] Function: Setting the Receiver Pager Code for the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch. OFF: No Opening Message Here’s how to program the Opening Message: 1. 5. Set Mode Item 46 [PAG. 6. 3. then press the PTT key to save the settings and exit to normal operation.ABK] Function: Enables/disables the Answer Back function of the Enhanced CTCSS Paging & Code Squelch. press the [0(SET)] key momentarily to confirm the message.

Available Values: AUTO/N-FM/AM/W-FM Default: AUTO (Mode automatically changes according to operating frequency) Set Mode Item 53 [RXSAVE] Function: Selects the Receive-mode Battery Saver interval (“sleep” ratio) Available Values: 200 MS(1:1)/300 MS(1:1. Set Mode Item 52 [RX MD] Function: Selects the receiving mode. then resume whether or not the other station is still transmitting.5)/1 S(1:5)/2 S(1:10)/OFF Default: 200 MS VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 99 . Available Values: –RPT/+RPT/SIMP Default: Depends on the transceiver version.DLY] Function: Select the time delay between when the PTT switch is pressed and the carrier is transmitted. as well as the setting of Set Mode Item 4: ARS. Available Values: 3SEC/5SEC/10SEC/BUSY/HOLD Default: BUSY 3SEC/5SEC/10SEC: The scanner will hold for the selected resume time. then will resume when the carrier drops. HOLD: The scanner will stop when a signal is received. BUSY: The scanner will hold until the signal disappears.5)/500 MS(1:2. Set Mode Item 50 [RF SQL] Function: Adjusts the RF Squelch threshold level.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 47 [PSWD] Function: Programs and activates the Password feature. Available Values: OFF/20MS/50MS/100MS/200MS Default: OFF Set Mode Item 49 [RESUME] Function: Selects the Scan Resume mode. and will not restart. Set Mode Item 48 [PTT. Available Values: OFF/S1/S2/S3/S4/S5/S6/S7/S8/S9/S9+ Default: OFF Set Mode Item 51 [RPT] Function: Sets the Repeater Shift Direction. See page ?? for details.

100 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .TYP. ONLY: The scanner will only scan channels that are flagged (Preferential Scan List). D CODE: DCS Encode only. Select the desired operating mode from the selections shown above. CONT: The transceiver makes a sweep in each direction as with the “SINGLE” mode.95 MHz (50 kHz increments) Default: Depends on the operating band and transceiver version. Set Mode Item 57 [SKIP] Function: Selects the Memory Scan “Skip” channel-selection mode. OFF: All memory channels will be scanned (the “flag” will be ignored).149. starting on the current frequency. Set Mode Item 55 [SCN. the search stops after one sweep in each direction. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF When this Set Mode Item is set to “ON. Available Values: ON/OFF Default: ON Set Mode Item 56 [SHIFT] Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater Shift. the radio continues sweeping until they are all filled.LMP] Function: Enables/Disables the Scan lamp while paused. Set Mode Item 58 [SPLIT] Function: Enables/Disables Split CTCSS/DCS coding. T DCS: Encodes a CTCSS tone and Decodes a DCS code. Available Values: OFF/SKIP/ONLY Default: OFF SKIP: The scanner will “skip” the flagged channels during scanning. D TONE: Encodes a DCS code and Decodes a CTCSS tone. Available Values: SINGLE/CONT Default: SINGLE SINGLE: The transceiver sweeps the current band once in each direction. Whether or not all 31 memories are filled.” you will see the following additional parameters after the “RV TN” parameter while configuring Set Mode Item 60: SQL. All channels where activity is present (up to 15 in each direction) are loaded into the Smart Search memories. but if all 31 channels are not filled after the first sweep. Available Values: 0.00 .SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 54 [S SRCH] Function: Selects the Smart Search Sweep mode.

SET] Function: Selects the display of the sensor units’ information.0k/100. and correction of the Barometric Pressure. Available Values: OFF/TONE/T SQL/DCS/RV TN Default: OFF TONE: CTCSS Encoder TSQL: CTCSS Encoder/Decoder DCS: Digital Coded Encoder/Decoder RV TN: Reverse CTCSS Decoder (Mutes receiver when matching tone is received) Note: See also Set Mode Item 58: SPLIT regarding additional selections available during “Split Tone” operation. Set Mode Item 61 [STEP] Function: Setting of the synthesizer steps.0k/50.ALT] Function: Selects the measurement units for the altimeter (require optional SU-1). Available Values: OFF/BARO/ALTI Default: OFF Note: The barometric pressure (BARO) and altitude (ALTI) information require the optional SU-1. LVL 2 (Wide FM) Set Mode Item 60 [SQL. or AUTO Default: AUTO (Step automatically changes according to operating frequency.SET (MENU) MODE Set Mode Item 59 [SQL] Function: Sets the Squelch threshold level.LVL 8 (Wide FM) Default: LVL 1 (Narrow FM). VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 101 .0k/20. Set Mode Item 63 [SU1.) Set Mode Item 62 [SU1. Available Values: 5.0k/10.0k.0k/25. Note: “OPTION” will be displayed if the SU-1 is not installed.LVL 15 (Narrow FM). Available Values: M (meter)/Ft (feet). offset: –1000 to +1000 Default: Depends on the transceiver version. LVL 0 . and correcting the altimeter. offset: –1000 to +1000 Default: Depends on the transceiver version.TYP] Function: Selects the Tone Encoder and/or Decoder mode. Available Values: LVL 0 . Note: “OPTION” will be displayed if the SU-1 is not installed.0k/12.BRM] Function: Selects the measurement units for the Barometric Pressure (require optional SU-1). Set Mode Item 64 [SU1.5k/15. Available Values: HP (hpa)/MB (mbar)/HG (mmHg)/IC (inch).

SET (MENU) MODE
Set Mode Item 65 [TEMP] Function: Indicates indicate the current temperature inside the transceivre’s case and selects the measurement units (“°F” or “°C”) for the temperature sensor. Set Mode Item 66 [TN FRQ] Function: Setting of the CTCSS Tone FreCTCSS TONE FREQUENCY (Hz) 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 quency. Available Values: 50 standard CTCSS tones 82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 Default: 100.0 Hz 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 Set Mode Item 67 [TOT] 171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 Function: Setting of the TOT time 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5 Available Values: OFF/1MIN/3MIN/5MIN/ 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 254.1 – – – – 10MIN Default: 3MIN The time-out timer shuts off the transmitter after continuous transmission of the programmed time. Set Mode Item 68 [TS MUT] Function: Enables/Disables the receiver audio output while the Tone Serch Scanner is activated. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 69 [TS SPD] Function: Selects the Tone Serch Scanner speed. Available Values: FAST (2.5 tone/sec)/SLOW (1.25 tone/sec) Default: FAST Set Mode Item 70 [TXSAVE] Function: Enables/Disables the Transmitter Battery Saver. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF Set Mode Item 71 [VFO MD] Function: Enables or disables the VFO band edge limiting for the current band. Available Values: BAND/ALL Default: BAND BAND: When the VFO frequency reaches the high band edge of the current band, the VFO frequency will jump to the low band edge of the current band (or vice versa). ALL: When the VFO frequency reaches the high edge of the current band, the VFO frequency will jump to the low band edge of the next band (or vice versa).

102

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL

SET (MENU) MODE
Set Mode Item 72 [WAKEUP] Function: Available Values: OFF/5S/10S/20S/30S/EAI Default: OFF Set Mode Item 73 [WX ALT] Function: Enables/Disables the Weather Alert Scan feature. Available Values: OFF/ON Default: OFF

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL

103

SPECIFICATIONS
General
Frequency Ranges: (USA Version) RX 0.5 - 1.8 MHz (BC Band), 1.8 - 30 MHz (SW Band), 30 - 76(59) MHz (50 MHz HAM Band), 76(59) - 108 MHz (FM Band), 108 - 137 MHz (Air Band), 137 - 174 MHz (144 MHz HAM Band), 174 - 222 MHz (VHF TV Band), 222 - 420 MHz (ACT 1 Band), 420 - 470 MHz (430 MHz HAM Band), 470 - 800 (729) (UHF TV Band), (757 - 774) (UHF TV Band), 800 - 999.990 MHz (ACT 2 Band; USA Cellular Blocked) TX 144 - 146(148) MHz, 222 - 225 MHz (USA only) 430 - 440(450) MHz, 5/9/10/12.5/15/20/25/50/100 kHz ±5 ppm @ 14 ºF to 140 ºF (–10 °C to +60 °C) ±600 kHz (144 MHz), ±1.6/5.0/7.6 MHz (430 MHz) F2D, F3E 50 Ω Nominal: 7.4 V DC, Negative Ground Operating: 5.0 ~ 16.0 V DC (EXT DC Jack) 11.0 ~ 16.0 V DC (EXT DC Jack with Charging) 150 mA (Receive) 60 mA (Standby, Saver Off) 20 mA (Standby, Saver On) 1 mA (ON Timer Activated) 200 µA (Auto Power Off) 1.6 A (5 W TX, 144 MHz) ?? A (1.5 W TX, 222 MHz: USA only) 1.8 A (5 W TX, 430 MHz) –4 ºF to 140 ºF (–20 °C to +60 °C) 2.3” (W) x 3.5” (H) x 1.1” (D) (58 x 89 x 28.5 mm) (W/O knob, antenna, and belt clip) 9.5 Oz (270 g) with FNB-80LI, and antenna

Channel Steps: Frequency Stability: Repeater Shift: Emission Type: Antenna Impedance: Supply Voltage: (Negative Ground) Current Consumption: (Approx. @7.4 V)

Operating Temperature: Case Size: Weight:

104

VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL

5 W 0. Frequency ranges will vary according to transceiver version. WFM: USA) 1.5 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (76-108 MHz.5 µV TYP for 10 dB SN (108-137 MHz.5 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (800-999. NFM) 0. WFM) 1. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 105 .5 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (59-108 MHz.3 W 222 MHz 1. and 430 MHz amateur bands only.5-30 MHz.8 V) Specifications are subject to change without notice.0 W 0.2 µV for 12 dB SINAD (350-400 MHz.2 W Variable Reactance F2D. NFM) 1. NFM) 1 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (54-59 MHz.35 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (30-54 MHz.5 µV for 12 dB SINAD (300-350 MHz.0 W 0. NFM: Double-Conversion Superheterodyne WFM: Triple-Conversion Superheterodyne Intermediate Frequencies: 1st 2nd 3rd AM. NFM) 0.2 µV for 12 dB SINAD (137-140 MHz. check with your dealer. FM) 1 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (174-222 MHz.7 MHz 1 MHz Sensitivity : 3 µV TYP for 10 dB SN (0.5 W 1. 222. WFM) 0. FM) 0. FM) 0. WFM) 3 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (540-800 MHz. AM) 0.16 µV for 12 dB SINAD (140-150 MHz.18 µV for 12 dB SINAD (400-470 MHz.0 W 2.2 µV for 12 dB SINAD (150-174 MHz.5 µV for 12 dB SINAD (470-540 MHz. NFM: 47. NFM) 1 µV TYP for 12 dB SINAD (54-76 MHz. and are guaranteed within the 144. AM) (Cellular Blocked) 0. NFM: USA) 1.0 kHz (F2D. NFM) Selectivity: AM.4 V) 400 mW @ 8 W for 10 % THD (@ 13. F3E) At least 60 dB down (@ High power) At least 50 dB down (@ Low 2 and Low 1 power) 2 kΩ Modulation Type: Maximum Deviation: Spurious Emission: Microphone Impedance: Receiver Circuit Type: AM.25 MHz 10.5 W 1. WFM) 1.25 MHz 450 kHz – WFM: 47.990 MHz.SPECIFICATIONS Transmitter RF Power Output: High Low 3 Low 2 Low 1 144 MHz/430 MHz 5. NFM: 12 kHz/35 kHz (–6 dB /–60 dB) WFM: 200 kHz/300 kHz (–6 dB /–20 dB) AF Output: 200 mW @ 8 W for 10 % THD (@ 7. F3E ±5.

000 .5 kHz 25 kHz 12.336.5 kHz 50 kHz 5 kHz 12.440.999.000 222.76.000 144.470.600 160.000 .000 .50.225.000 .975 .000 420.450 157.500 .000 88.000 225.108.000 137.300.5 kHz 100 kHz 12.999.162.420.5 kHz 50 kHz 12.30.300.160.157.000 .000 108.000 .450 .5 kHz 106 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .174.000 450.1.162.5 kHz 50 kHz 12.000 420.500 161.000 .5 kHz 5 kHz 12.000 .000 .156.000 .5 kHz 25 kHz 12.000 137.000 156.900 162.000 222.108.222.000 .000 430.000 MODE AM AM AM FM WFM WFM AM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM FM WFM FM FM AM FM FM FM WFM FM STEP 10 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 25 kHz 12.000 470.000 .000 .88.000 .5 kHz 25 kHz 12.320.000 30.500 .800.5 kHz 25 kHz 12.000 MODE AM AM FM FM WFM AM FM FM FM WFM FM AM FM FM FM FM WFM FM STEP 9 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 100 kHz 25 kHz 12.000 803.025 .025 162.000 336.800 1.88.000 300.500 .222.000 .000 .000 .600 .000 .5 kHz 25 kHz 12.600 .000 148.000 .000 .174.470.5 kHz 25 kHz 12.000 174.5 kHz EXP Version FREQENCY RANGE (MHZ) 0.137.59.000 174.000 .000 800.975 160.500 50.000 88.000 108.160.000 59.000 .144.000 .000 .5 kHz 25 kHz 12.5 kHz 50 kHz 12.430.000 .000 .“AUTO” MODE PRESET OPERATING PARAMETERS USA Version FREQENCY RANGE (MHZ) 0.000 .000 .000 470.000 .000 440.000 76.5 kHz 12.000 .500 .137.161.800.900 .800 .1.148.160.000 .800 .000 300.800 1.450.30.000 30.600 160.000 320.420.

Align the connector on the SU-1 with the transceiver’s connector and gently press the unit into place. Locate the connector for the SU-1 under the caution seal in the battery compartment on the back of the radio. Remove the hard or soft case. calibrated Barometer or Altimeter devices used for navigation critical to personal safety.INSTALLATION OF THE SU-1 (OPTION) 1. Make sure that the transceiver is off. 4. Installation is now complete. and replace the battery. 6. just peel off the caution seal. 5. 3. VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL 107 . Important note The Barometric Pressure/Altitude features of the optional SU-1 are designed to be supplemental aids for the information of the user. if used. Remove the battery pack. Affix the new (supplied) caution seal. 2. and are not intended to be a substitute for accurate.

NOTE 108 VX-6R OPERATING MANUAL .

1. . WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW. and (2) this device must accept any interference including received. or readily being altered. by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER The Scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or modified to a digital scanner receiver by any user. 2. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by VERTEX STANDARD could void the user’s authorization to operate this device. 3. interference that may cause undesired operation.

. LTD.. No portion of this manual may be reproduced without the permission of VERTEX STANDARD CO. All rights reserved. LTD.Copyright 2005 VERTEX STANDARD CO. Printed in Japan E H 0 2 1 M 1 0 0 0502d-0M .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful